P. 1
Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

|Views: 739|Likes:
Published by Razaleigh Mohd Amin

More info:

Published by: Razaleigh Mohd Amin on Jun 14, 2012
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

08/08/2013

pdf

text

original

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R007

Product Description

Issue Date Part Number

01 2007-06-15 31400815

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Copyright © 2007 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Network Application.................................................................................................................1-1 2 Function........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Capacity...........................................................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity.........................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity..............................................................................................................................2-4 2.2 Service.............................................................................................................................................................2-6 2.2.1 SDH Services.........................................................................................................................................2-6 2.2.2 PDH Services.........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.3 Ethernet Services....................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.4 RPR Services..........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.5 ATM Services........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.6 DDN Services.........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.7 SAN Services.........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.8 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................................2-8 2.3 Interface...........................................................................................................................................................2-9 2.3.1 Service Interfaces...................................................................................................................................2-9 2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces..............................................................................................2-10 2.4 Networking....................................................................................................................................................2-11 2.5 Built-in WDM Technology...........................................................................................................................2-13 2.6 ROPA System...............................................................................................................................................2-13 2.7 Intelligent Power Adjustment........................................................................................................................2-14 2.8 External Clock Output Shutdown Function..................................................................................................2-14 2.9 Extended Subrack..........................................................................................................................................2-14 2.10 Board REG Function...................................................................................................................................2-15 2.11 Protection....................................................................................................................................................2-17 2.11.1 Equipment Level Protection...............................................................................................................2-17 2.11.2 Network Level Protection..................................................................................................................2-18 2.12 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................................2-18 2.13 TCM............................................................................................................................................................2-19 2.14 E13/M13 Function.......................................................................................................................................2-19 2.15 RPR.............................................................................................................................................................2-19 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i

Contents

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

2.16 ETH-OAM..................................................................................................................................................2-20 2.17 Software Package Loading..........................................................................................................................2-20 2.18 Hot Fix.........................................................................................................................................................2-21 2.19 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression..................................................................................................................2-21 2.20 PRBS Function............................................................................................................................................2-21 2.21 Board Version Replacement........................................................................................................................2-22 2.22 OAM Information Interworking..................................................................................................................2-22 2.23 Clock...........................................................................................................................................................2-23

3 Hardware......................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.3 Subrack............................................................................................................................................................3-4 3.3.1 Subrack Structure...................................................................................................................................3-4 3.3.2 Slot Allocation........................................................................................................................................3-5 3.3.3 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-28 3.4 Boards............................................................................................................................................................3-29 3.4.1 Board Type...........................................................................................................................................3-29 3.4.2 SDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-33 3.4.3 PDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-35 3.4.4 DDN Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-36 3.4.5 Data Processing Boards........................................................................................................................3-37 3.4.6 WDM Boards.......................................................................................................................................3-39 3.4.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards........................................................................................................3-39 3.4.8 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................................3-40

4 Software....................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Board Software................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.3 NE Software....................................................................................................................................................4-3 4.4 T2000 System..................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.5 ASON Software...............................................................................................................................................4-5

5 Data Features...............................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Ethernet Features.............................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................5-7 5.1.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-11 5.2 RPR Features.................................................................................................................................................5-14 5.2.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-14 5.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-18 5.2.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-20 5.3 ATM Features...............................................................................................................................................5-23 5.3.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-23 ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

........................................................5-29 5.....6-5 6..................................................3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration...........................2 End-to-End Service Configuration.2 HWECC.............................8 Copper Services...............................................................1...................OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Contents 5.......................2 SDH DCN Solutions..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-4 7.........................................4 SAN Features...........................................................................................................................1......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3........................................................................................................2 Application.....................................................................................................5............................................................................6-6 6......................................................................................................3............................................1.....................................7-18 7..........................................16 Equilibrium of Network Traffic................4.....................7-6 7.............................................7-15 7.................................................2 Application.........................................................................................................................................................6-1 6............................1 Features..........................................................................7-21 7..................................................................6-2 6.....................3.................3 Protection.5 Diamond Services...............................3 IP Over DCC................................................1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links......1 Features.........................................................................................5-31 5.....................................2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links...........5-32 6 DCN Features.................7-20 7..7-3 7..................................................................................................19 Protocol Encryption..............................................................................................................................................................................17 Shared Risk Link Group..................................................................4 OSI Over DCC..................................................................................................................................................6-4 6.............10 Tunnels..........4........................................7-22 7...............12 Service Optimization.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies...................................6-6 6...................7-22 7.........................................7-19 7...........7-3 7................................................................................................................................5-30 5...........................................................................................7 Silver Services........6-8 7 ASON Features..................................7-20 7...................................................................6-4 6....................6-2 6.................................................11 Service Association..........................................................................................................................................................2 Application................................................................................................................................................................7-1 7......................................................................................................................15 Preset Restoring Trail..........................................................................................................5-31 5........................................4 SLA..................................1.........................................................................5 DDN Features...................................5-25 5....................................13 Service Migration......5..........9 Iron Services.............................................7-12 7..............................................6-3 6....7-7 7.......................................................................................14 Reverting Services to Original Routes............................6-7 6...............................................................................................................................................................................1 Background of SDH DCN...............................................................................2................................................................................7-13 7........................................................7-5 7...............................................................................................................................................................................................7-23 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii .................................7-8 7..........................................................................................................7-21 7...............................................................18 ASON Trail Group.........3..7-17 7.....................2 Application........6 Gold Services.................................................................2..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-8 6...............................................2 Application........1 Overview....................................7-16 7..1 Features..............1 Functions.....................6-6 6........

..........................10-2 10..........2..................................................................................................................................9-2 9.......................................................................................................2....................10-3 iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .....8-7 8.......... 8-5 8.................................................6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit...4 Internal Clock Source................................................. 8-8 8.............8-11 8........................................................................................................1...........................................................................1............................................................2.....................................9-7 9.......1........................9-4 9....................3 SNCP.....................................................2...........8-6 8...............3 Free-Run Mode..................................1.........................................................1 Equipment Level Protection.........................................................................1.............................2 MSP Ring.............................................8-15 8................................................................................................1........................8-9 8.............9-3 9.......................................4 DNI......9-1 9...........9-6 9.......................................1 Operation and Maintenance.......................................1................................7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit...............................................................................................................................................................................................................2 Network Management.......................8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection....6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP........................2..................................................1........................................................................................................8-1 8...............................................................................................................................................................................................................10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions......................8-18 8......................................1.........................................................................................5.............................................2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled ............................................................................1......................................................................7 RPR Protection........2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units.......................1.........................................................................................................................................9-5 9.....8-16 8............................................................................2 Application of the Retiming Function.....2...1..............1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled ........................................................................................1 Linear MSP............................................................2 Hold-Over Mode.............................................8 Intelligent Fans.....................1... 8-6 8................9 1:N Protection for the +3............................................................................9-2 9.......................................................4 Clock Protection............8-3 8...........................................................................................................................3 Tributary Clock Source................9-7 10 OAM......................2 Line Clock Source...................................................................8-6 8....1 Retiming Principle................................................... 9-5 9.........................2 Clock Working Mode.............8-4 8.......5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection..................................................................1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards...........................................8-17 8..............10-1 10.................9-3 9.....3 Clock Outputs...........................................................1 Clock Source..................Contents OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection......................................................9-2 9...2....................................................................................8-19 9 Clock..9-3 9.................................................................................................................1 External Clock Source.......................................................9-4 9........................1 Locked Mode..............2..........................4......................................................4......8-2 8................................................... 8-2 8..........2..2 Network Level Protection.........................................................................................................................................9-3 9.............................................................9-3 9..3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit................................................................................... 8-7 8.....2...................................................................................................5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards........................................................................ 9-3 9..............................................................................5 Tributary Retiming..................................................................................................................9-2 9.........................................................................................3 V Board Power Supply...........................1..2......................................................3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled .......4 1+1 Protection for the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Boards.................................................... 8-7 8..................5.................8-4 8....................................................................................4..

...................................C-1 Index...................................................................2 Timing and Synchronization Performance.................................................A-2 A...............11-16 11......................................6 Timeslot Numbering.......................10 Safety Certification...4............................................................................11-16 11.......................................................................3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces...............11-11 11.......................12..........................................11-10 11.........................2.............11-15 11.................................................................7 Power Supply Specification...................11-12 11................................................................................................10-3 11 Technical Specifications.......4..............................................11-20 11...................................................................................................................................................3 Environment for Operation......12 Environment Requirement........5 Transmission Performance..............................................................................11-22 11....................................1 ITU-T Recommendations.....................................................................3..........................................................................................................4 Laser Safety Class.................................................................................................................................................11-15 11...................11-3 11......................................................................................................................................2 Environment for Transportation.................................................2.......................................................................................................................................8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards..................................................B-1 C Acronyms and Abbreviations..................................................................3......12............................................11 Environmental Specification...............................................................................................................11-15 11.....................................................................11-12 11..................................................................................................2........2 DDN Interface.........A-1 A..................................................................OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Contents 10.....3.....................................11-15 11.......................................................9 Electromagnetic Compatibility.....11-13 11..........................11-1 11...........................................11-24 11..........................................................................11-3 11................................................................................................................................................................................3 IETF Standards..............................................................4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance.....................................................11-22 11........1 Clock Interface Type.............................................................3 Auxiliary Interface.........11-21 11..................................................................................1 PDH Electrical Interface...............................A-4 A............................2...11-20 11..........................................................11-17 11............11-3 11...................................A-4 B Glossary...................................................................................................................2 Specifications of the Optical Interface.............................................................................2 Ethernet Optical Interface.....................................11-26 A Compliant Standards..........................................................................................................................................................11-12 11...............................................................1 Environment for Storage......................................................4 Environment Related Standards................i-1 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v ..........A-3 A............................................................................................................................................3 Security Management....2 IEEE Standards.......................................................11-9 11.................3 ATM Optical Interface...........................................................................................................................................................................................1 Interface Types..............................12....1 SDH Optical Interface............

.

...................................................................................................2-6 Figure 2-6 ROPA System....................................................................................................................................5-21 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii ................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-7 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS.......................................3-3 Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack................................................................5-11 Figure 5-6 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS..........................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-16 Steering protection...................................................5-14 Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse....5-10 Figure 5-5 EVPLAN service......2-4 Figure 2-2 Access capacity of each slot when the N1EXCSA board is used...................5-18 Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different.................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-3 Access capacity of each slot when the N1UXCSA/B board is used.......................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-8 RPR ring....................................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-5 Access capacity of each slot when the N1IXCSA/B board is used...................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-7 Connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack............................................................................................................................................................................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500...................................................................2-16 Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment....................................................................................................................................2-5 Figure 2-4 Access capacity of each slot when the N1SXCSA/B board is used........................................................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence.........................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port............................................5-17 Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1......................5-20 Figure 5-15 Wrapping protection..............................................................................................................................................................................5-18 Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing.................................................................................3-30 Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 3500................................................................................................................................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture.................5-19 Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service......................................................................1-3 Figure 2-1 Access capacity of each slot when the N1GXCSA board is used..........................5-7 Figure 5-2 EPL service based on port+VLAN......................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-8 Hybrid application of ADM and REG.......................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet...... forwarding and stripping....OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figures Figures Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.....................................................5-9 Figure 5-4 EPLAN service.................................................3-6 Figure 3-5 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................................5-8 Figure 5-3 EVPL service..........................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14 Figure 7-9 Tunnel.....................................................................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-10 Lower cross-connnection...........................................................................................................8-16 Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection....................................................8-15 Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings.......................................................................................................................................................................6-2 Figure 6-2 Positions of D bytes in SDH overheads..................................................................................................................6-3 Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC..............................................................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection.........................................7-4 Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery........8-14 Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure...................................6-5 Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC).......................................................................................................Figures OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 5-17 Wrapping+steering protection......6-8 Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (OSI).....................................................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection....................................7-9 Figure 7-7 Gold services......7-19 Figure 7-12 Traffic equilibrium.................5-27 Figure 5-19 VP-Ring/VC-Ring..............................................................................................................5-22 Figure 5-18 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services.........................................................................................................................................................................................................6-6 Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (IP)................8-18 Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR...............................................7-12 Figure 7-8 A silver service............8-18 Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection.......................8-17 Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP.....7-6 Figure 7-5 Trail restoration.......................................7-18 Figure 7-11 Service Association.............6-7 Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (IP)......................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-13 Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking.............................................................................................................................................7-23 Figure 7-14 LCAS (same path)...5-29 Figure 6-1 DCN networking................................................................................................................6-5 Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC).........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-7 Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (OSI).....................................................7-7 Figure 7-6 Diamond Services.................................................................................................8-20 Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled.................................................................................................................................................6-9 Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links....................................................7-3 Figure 7-2 Management of control topology..........................................................7-22 Figure 7-13 LCAS (different path)...............................................................................................................8-14 Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure..................................................8-12 Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate....................5-28 Figure 5-20 IMA service networking.....8-17 Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines....................................................................................................................................................................................................................9-5 viii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .........................................................................................................................................................................................7-5 Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration........................................................................................................................................................................................7-23 Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail.............................................................................................................................

.....................................................................9-5 Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled..................................................................OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figures Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM.................9-6 Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram................................................................9-6 Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID....................................................9-8 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary ix .....................................................................................................9-8 Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming...................................................................................................................................................9-7 Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming..............................................

.

.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5-2 Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2............................................3-30 Table 3-6 SDH processing boards..............................................5-5 Table 5-5 Function list of RPR boards....................................................................................3-29 Table 3-5 Constituent boards and functions of each unit.....................................................5-29 Table 5-11 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4..............................................................................3-39 Table 3-11 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces...........................................................................................................2-17 Table 2-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500..............................................................................5-23 Table 5-8 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1...........................................................................................................................2-16 Table 2-9 Equipment level protection........................................................2-18 Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets..................................3-35 Table 3-8 DDN processing boards..........2-10 Table 2-5 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................3-36 Table 3-9 Data processing boards and their interfaces................................................2-16 Table 2-8 Optical interfaces for the REG...................2-9 Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3-39 Table 3-12 Auxiliary boards and theri interfaces.................5-26 Table 5-10 Classification of ATM protection........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-3 Table 2-2 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500...................................................................................5-24 Table 5-9 ATM service types and traffic types........................................................................................................................3-7 Table 3-3 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500.......................................................... 3-7 Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack..................................................3-37 Table 3-10 WDM boards and theri interfaces......................................................3-40 Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0........................ 3-3 Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards................................................................................................................................................5-16 Table 5-7 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1...............................5-15 Table 5-6 RPR service class.................................................................5-5 Table 5-4 Function list of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4.............. and N1EFT8A......................................................................................................................................2-8 Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500....................... N1EFT8..................................................................5-3 Table 5-3 Function list of N1EGT2...................................................................................................................................................................................................2-11 Table 2-6 Configuration of the extended subrack..3-33 Table 3-7 PDH processing boards.................................................................................................................................2-15 Table 2-7 Boards that support the REG function..........................OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Tables Tables Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500..................................................................................5-30 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xi ..................................................................

....................11-6 Table 11-7 Specifications of the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.................................................................................................................................................................................................11-13 Table 11-16 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface.............................................8-3 Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-4 Table 11-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500...................................................................................................................11-11 Table 11-13 Laser safety class..............................................................................................8-4 Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit..............8-3 Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units........................................................................7-16 Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels......................................................11-11 Table 11-14 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces.............................................................................................8-6 Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters.............................................11-4 Table 11-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500...............................................7-7 Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services.11-10 Table 11-11 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14 Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services...................................................................7-8 Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services....11-5 Table 11-6 Specifications of the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500..................................................................................................................8-8 Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500...........7-18 Table 7-11 Attributes of service association.................Tables OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 5-12 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA..................................6-4 Table 7-1 Service level..........................................7-10 Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.......................................................................................................................................8-10 Table 8-11 SNCP parameters...11-8 Table 11-9 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.......................................................7-13 Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services..................................................................................................................7-11 Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services...............................11-7 Table 11-8 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces..............................................8-12 Table 11-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................................................................................................................................11-10 Table 11-12 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................8-5 Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX...............................................................................................................11-9 Table 11-10 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces....................................7-16 Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services...............................................8-9 Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters..................................................................7-19 Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes..11-12 Table 11-15 DDN interface types.........................................................................11-5 Table 11-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500....................................................................................................11-3 Table 11-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................................................................8-4 Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4.......................................11-14 xii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) ..................................................................................................5-31 Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500.........................................................................................................................8-5 Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.............................................................11-13 Table 11-17 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces...........................................................................................7-9 Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service...................................7-21 Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards...............................................................................................................................................................................................

........................11-15 Table 11-22 Transmission performance................................................................................................................11-27 Table 11-41 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation.......11-16 Table 11-24 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)...................A-4 Table A-4 Environment related standards........................................................................................................................................................11-14 Table 11-20 Clock features.....................................................................................................................................................................................11-16 Table 11-26 Power consumption and weight of boards......................................................................................................11-25 Table 11-35 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation.......................................11-16 Table 11-23 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)..........................................................................................................11-25 Table 11-36 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation...........................................11-14 Table 11-19 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-22 Table 11-31 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage.....................A-4 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xiii ..........................11-26 Table 11-39 Other climate requirements.............................................................................................................................11-26 Table 11-37 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation....11-28 Table 11-42 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation.............................................................................OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Tables Table 11-18 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces.........A-3 Table A-3 IETF standards.................11-24 Table 11-33 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage...................................11-20 Table 11-28 Safety certifications.............................................................................11-16 Table 11-25 Power supply specifications...........11-28 Table A-1 IUT-T recommendations.............................11-23 Table 11-32 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage.11-27 Table 11-40 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-17 Table 11-27 EMC test results..........................................................................................................................................................11-15 Table 11-21 Timing and synchronization performance...................................11-26 Table 11-38 Requirements for temperature and humidity...........................................................................................................................................11-24 Table 11-34 Climate requirements for transportation..................................................................A-2 Table A-2 IEEE standards.........................11-22 Table 11-30 Climate requirements for storage....................11-21 Table 11-29 Environment specifications for long-term operation..................................................

.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . hardware and software structure. Chapter 1 Network Application Description Describes the OptiX OSN 3500 and its position in the network. Product Name OptiX OSN 3500 Version V100R007 Intended Audience The intended audiences of this document are: l l l l Policy planning Installation and Commissioning engineer NM configuration engineer Technical support engineer Organization This document is organized as follows. Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description About This Document About This Document Purpose This document describes the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of network application. functions. and features.

interface. TCM and network management. This appendix lists the terms used in this document. application and protection. REG. ROP system. board software. This chapter describes the DCN feature supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. built-in WDM technology. This appendix lists international standards to which the OptiX OSN 3500 conforms in terms of design and performance. Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 3500. They are defined as follows. Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 3500. 3 Hardware 4 Software 5 Data Features 6 DCN Features 7 ASON Features 8 Protection 9 Clock 10 OAM 11 Technical Specifications A Compliant Standards B Glossary C Acronyms and Abbreviations Conventions Symbol Conventions The following symbols may be found in this document. NE software and NM software. This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of service classes and application. Describes the Ethernet. This chapter describes the interface specifications. It includes intelligent software. 2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . RPR and ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of function. protection. Describes protection modes (including equipment level and network level) and characteristics supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.About This Document OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Chapter 2 Function Description This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of capacity. The appendix lists the acronyms used in this document. maintenance and centralised management. This chapter describes the clock function of the OptiX OSN 3500. This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of safe operation. transmission performance and environment requirements for the OptiX OSN 3500.

Command arguments are in italic. and users are in boldface. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which.. For example. } * Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. if not avoided. if not avoided. } [ x | y | .. WARNING CAUTION TIP NOTE General Conventions Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description About This Document Symbol Description DANGER Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. ] { x | y | . Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected. One or none is selected. Names of files. Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional. will result in death or serious injury. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. or unexpected results. folders. and performance degradation. One is selected. directories. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3 . Terminal display is in Courier New. log in as user root. could cause equipment damage. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your time... could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that. if not avoided. data loss. Command Conventions Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | .. Book titles are in italics.

Key 2 Description Press the key. N3SL16A. pressingCtrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Sections of the new features are added.7 "Intelligent Optical Power Adjustment" Section 2. TN11MR4. Keyboard Operation Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1. A means the two keys should be pressed in turn. For example. Update History This document of the V100R007 version is of the first release. For example. N1SLD16. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. tabs. and dialog titles are in boldface. N2PD3. N2PL3A. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. parameters. window. For example.21 "Board Version Replacement" Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) 4 . click OK. N2PL3. press Enter and press Tab. this version has the following new or optimized content: l Description of the N1SLD64.About This Document OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description GUI Conventions Convention Boldface > Description Buttons. N3SL16.8 "External Clock Output Shutdown Function" Section 2. TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4 is added. – – – – – – – l Section 2.18 "Hot Fix" Section 2. Press the keys concurrently. For example.17 "Software Package Loading" Section 2.10 "PRBS Function" Section 2. For example. choose File > Create > Folder. Press the keys in turn. TN11MR2. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.19 "Inter-Board Alarm Suppression" Section 2. menus. TN11OBU1. pressing Alt. N2PQ3. Compared with the V100R006. Mouse Operation Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

The OptiX OSN 3500 is new generation equipment developed by Huawei Technologies Co.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 1 Network Application 1 l l l l l l l l Network Application The OptiX OSN 3500 is mainly used at the convergence layer and the backbone layer of an MAN transmission network.. Ltd (hereinafter referred to as Huawei). Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500. The OptiX OSN 3500 integrates the following technologies: Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) Ethernet Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) Storage area network (SAN) Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) Digital data network (DDN) Automatically switched optical network (ASON) The OptiX OSN 3500 transmits voice and data services on the same platform with high efficiency. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1 .

1 Network Application

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500

The OptiX OSN 3500 can also be networked with the following equipment to optimize the investment and to lower the networking costs for customers. The OptiX OSN 3500 can be networked with the following equipment:
l l l l l l

OptiX OSN 9500 OptiX OSN 7500 OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500

Figure 1-2 shows the application of the OptiX OSN 3500 in a transmission network.

1-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

1 Network Application

Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 9500 OptiX OSN 7500 Backbone layer OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 3500 Convergence layer OptiX OSN 1500 OptiX OSN 2500 Access layer

GSM/CDMA

PSTN

Ethernet

...

ATM

SAN

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN) Storage Area Network (SAN) Ethernet

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1-3

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

2 Function

2
About This Chapter
The equipment has many functions. 2.1 Capacity The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and access capacity.

Function

2.2 Service The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services. 2.3 Interface The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces. 2.4 Networking The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used for several network topologies such as the ring network and the chain network. 2.5 Built-in WDM Technology The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber. 2.6 ROPA System The equipment supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals in a long distance. 2.7 Intelligent Power Adjustment The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function. 2.8 External Clock Output Shutdown Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the external clock output shutdown function. 2.9 Extended Subrack The OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services and 24 x E3/T3 services. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection for E1/T1 services and 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services. 2.10 Board REG Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the board REG function. 2.11 Protection
Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1

the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with those of the old version board.18 Hot Fix The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot fix technology. 2.20 PRBS Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function. the board software versions can be automatically updated.2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.15 RPR The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut or a link failure. Once a board is in service. 2.13 TCM The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors. 2.16 ETH-OAM With the development of Ethernet services. 2. 2. 2. you can check if the board software versions match when the board is in service. 2.22 OAM Information Interworking OptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking. 2.23 Clock The OptiX OSN equipment supports the clock functions. 2.14 E13/M13 Function The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16×E1/21×T1 signals into one E3/T3 signal or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16×E1/21×T1 signals. The NE-level software then can be loaded and activated in a mass manner to simplify the operations to upgrade the NE-level software. 2. the equipment maintainability becomes more and more important. 2. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the E13/M13 function. 2.17 Software Package Loading The software package loading is performed to upgrade and manage the NE-level software in a mass manner.12 ASON Features The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.19 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.21 Board Version Replacement The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement. 2-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . Also.

which is a lower order cross-connect board for the extended subrack. which is an enhanced cross-connect and timing board.1 Cross-Connect Capacity The OptiX OSN 3500 provides cross-connect boards of different cross-connect capacities. The following cross-connect boards can be used for the OptiX OSN 3500: l l l The N1GXCSA board. l l Table 2-1 lists the cross-connect capacity of each cross-connect board for the OptiX OSN 3500. 2. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack.75 Gbit/s (376 x 376 VC-4) Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack. which are greatly enhanced cross-connect and timing boards. Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 Board Higher Order CrossConnect Capacity 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4) 80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4) 80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4) Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity Access Capacity Remarks N1GXCSA 5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4) 5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4) 35 Gbit/s (224 x 224 VC-4) 58. The N1IXCSA/N1XCSB board.2 Slot Access Capacity With different cross-connect boards. the OptiX OSN 3500 provides different access capacities. The N1XCE board. The N1UXCSA/N1UXCSB and the N1SXCSA/N1SXCSB boards. which is an infinitely enhanced cross-connect and timing board.1 Capacity The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and access capacity. N1EXCSA N1UXCSA 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4) Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-3 .1 Cross-Connect Capacity The OptiX OSN 3500 provides cross-connect boards of different cross-connect capacities. which is a general cross-connect and timing board.1. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack. 2.75 Gbit/s (376 x 376 VC-4) 58.1. 2. The N1EXCSA board.1.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Function 2.

25 Gbit/s (1000 x 1000 VC-4) 1. Used for the main subrack and for connection to the 1. N1SXCSA 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4) 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4) N1SXCSB N1IXCSA 200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4) 200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4) 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4) 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4) N1IXCSB XCE - 1. see Figure 2-1. the OptiX OSN 3500 provides different access capacities.2 Slot Access Capacity With different cross-connect boards.25 Gbit/ s (8 x 8 VC-4) Used for the main subrack and for connection to the 1.1.5Gbit/s 2. Used for the extended subrack.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5.25 Gbit/s (8 x 8 VC-4) 2. Figure 2-1 Access capacity of each slot when the N1GXCSA board is used FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 622Mbit/s FAN S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 10Gbit/s FAN S L O T 1 1 10Gbit/s S L O T 9 N1GXCSA S L O T 1 0 N1GXCSA S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 S L O T 1 5 S L O T 1 6 622Mbit/s S L O T 1 7 S L O T 1 8 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s 2.25 Gbit/s (1000 x 1000 VC-4) 155 Gbit/s (992 x 992 VC-4) 156.5Gbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s Fiber Routing 2-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary GSCC GSCC Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack.2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board Higher Order CrossConnect Capacity 80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4) 200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4) 200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4) Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity Access Capacity Remarks N1UXCSB 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4) 60 Gbit/s (384 x 384 VC-4) 155 Gbit/s (992 x 992 VC-4) 156.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and for connection to the 1.5Gbit/s 2. Figure 2-2.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Figure 2-3. For details.5Gbit/s 2.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Function Figure 2-2 Access capacity of each slot when the N1EXCSA board is used FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 N1EXCSA FAN S L O T 1 0 N1EXCSA FAN S L O T 1 1 10Gbit/s 1.5Gbit/s Fiber routing Figure 2-4 Access capacity of each slot when the N1SXCSA/B board is used FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 FAN S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 N1SXCSA/B Fiber routing Issue 01 (2007-06-15) N1SXCSA/B Huawei Technologies Proprietary 20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s or GSCC GSCC 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 2.25Gbit/s 1.5Gbit/s 2.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.5Gbit/s 1.5Gbit/s 2.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s GSCC S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8 or GSCC Fiber routing Figure 2-3 Access capacity of each slot when the N1UXCSA/B board is used FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 N1UXCSA/B FAN S L O T 1 0 N1UXCSA/B FAN S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8 or GSCC GSCC 1.25Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s FAN S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8 2-5 .25Gbit/s 2.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 2.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 2.

7 SAN Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process SAN services.4 RPR Services The OptiX OSN 3500 provides FE and GE interfaces that support the resilient packet ring (RPR). 2. The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following SDH services: l l l Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16/64 Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c SDH services with FEC: 10.2. 2.8 Service Access Capacity The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies with the type and quantity of the configured boards. 2.1 SDH Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process SDH services. 2. 2.2.1 SDH Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process SDH services.2 Service The supported services are SDH services.5 ATM Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process ATM services.2.2.2. 2. PDH services and other services. 2.3 Ethernet Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process Ethernet services. 2.6 DDN Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process DDN services.2.2.2.2 PDH Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process PDH services.609 Gbit/s.2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 2-5 Access capacity of each slot when the N1IXCSA/B board is used FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 FAN S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 FAN S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8 N1IXCSA/B Fiber routing 2. 2.2. 2.666 Gbit/s Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) 2-6 N1IXCSA/B 20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s or GSCC GSCC 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s .

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides FE and GE interfaces to process the following Ethernet services: l l l l Ethernet private line (EPL) service Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service 2.2 PDH Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process PDH services. The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following RPR services: l l EVPL service EVPLAN service 2.3 Ethernet Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process Ethernet services.6 DDN Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process DDN services. The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following PDH services: l l l E1/T1 service E3/T3 service E4 service 2.2.2.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Function 2.5 ATM Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process ATM services.4 RPR Services The OptiX OSN 3500 provides FE and GE interfaces that support the resilient packet ring (RPR).2.2. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7 .7 SAN Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process SAN services. The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following ATM services: l l l l Constant bit rate (CBR) service Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service 2.2. The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following DDN services: l l N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service Framed E1 service 2.2.

Table 2-2 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 for accessing different services. Table 2-2 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 Service Type STM-64 standard or concatenated services STM-64 (FEC) services STM-16 standard or concatenated services STM-16 (FEC) services STM-4 standard or concatenated services STM-1 standard services STM-1 (electrical) services E4 services E3/T3 services E1/T1 services FE services GE services STM-4 ATM services STM-1 ATM services N x 64 kbit/s (N: 1–31) services Framed E1 services ESCON services FICON/FC100 services 2-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Maximum Number of Services Supported by a Single Subrack 8 4 44 8 46 204 132 32 117 504 180 56 15 60 64 64 44 22 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Using four independent multiservice access ports. The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services that is supported.2. the OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following SAN services: l l l l Fiber channel (FC) service Fiber connection (FICON) service Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service 2. when only one specific type of service is accessed.8 Service Access Capacity The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies with the type and quantity of the configured boards.

L-64. S-64.2c. 2. administration and auxiliary interfaces. L-4.2Je. L-16.3 Interface The interfaces include service interfaces.2. Ue-16. T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: BNC connectors Ethernet service interface DDN service interface 10/100Base-TX.2 STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4.1. V. X. L-1. L-4.2d.1. S-16. Ls-64.2f STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1 Service Interfaces Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces. 2.1.24. V-16. S-1.1.2. 1000Base-ZX RS232.2Je.2Je STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.3.2d. Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Interface SDH service interface Description STM-1 electrical interfaces: BNC connectors STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1. PDH service interface 75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 75-ohm E3. 100Base-FX.2e STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.2.3. Table 2-3 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. S-4.3.1. V-64. 1000Base-SX.1 Service Interfaces Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces. L-16. L-1.2b STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64. Ue-64.2.35. Framed E1 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Function Service Type FC200 services DVB-ASI services Maximum Number of Services Supported by a Single Subrack 8 44 2. Ue-16.1. Ue-64.2b.2 STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16.2.1 THz to 196. 2. EIA530.0 THz. V.2. L-16. 1000Base-LX. Ve-4. U-16.2b.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.21. I-64. Le-64.692 can output fixed wavelength from 191. EIA530-A. RS449.2c. Ve-1.1.

Table 2-4 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 3500.2.2.1. FC200. ESCON. L-16.1. FICON. L-1. Ve-4.2Je. L-4. L-1.3. Ue-16.2f. V-16. Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Interface Type Administration Description One remote maintenance interface (OAM) Four broadcast data interfaces (S1–S4) One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1) One Ethernet interface for network management (ETH) One administration serial interface (F&f) One extended subrack administration interface (EXT) One commissioning interface (COM) Orderwire interface One orderwire phone interface (PHONE) Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2) Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (used with two serial interfaces for transparent transmission of asynchronous data) Clock interface Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Alarm interface 16 alarm input and four alarm output interface Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces Alarm concatenation input interface 2-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .1.2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Interface ATM service interface Description STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1. Ve-1.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.2.2 are technical specifications defined by Huawei. Ue-16. N1PQM. N2PQ1 Storage area network (SAN) service interface FC100.2. U-16.2Je. S-1.2 STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.2Je.1. 2.2d. DVB-ASI service optical interfaces NOTE Ue-16. Ve-4.2c. L-4.2 E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3/ N1PL3/PL3A board IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1. Ve-1. Le-64.

ATM. and Metro equipment series. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports both separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of NEs: l l l Terminal multiplexer (TM) Add/drop multiplexer (ADM) Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM) OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN.4 Networking The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used for several network topologies such as the ring network and the chain network. and the access layer. the OptiX 3500 can be interconnected to WDM equipment.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Function 2. to provide a complete transmission network solution. l The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used with other OptiX OSN equipment to provide a complete ASON solution. Such a solution covers all layers including the backbone layer. Table 2-5 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 3500 Networking Mode 1 2 Chain Ring Topology 3 Tangent rings Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-11 . or DDN interface. l l Table 2-5 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Through an SDH. the OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected to the OptiX Metro equipment. PDH. the convergence layer. Through an SDH interface or a GE interface. the paths for transmitting and receiving the K byte should be consistent. DWDM. NOTE When the OptiX OSN 3500 is interconnected to other equipment. Ethernet.

2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Networking Mode 4 Intersecting rings Topology 5 Ring with chain 6 DNI 7 Hub 8 Mesh Legends: MADM ADM TM ASON NE 2-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .

ROP board. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the built-in WDM technology.692 compliant standard wavelengths is supported. signals are all transparently transmitted. with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms. Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. For these client-side signals. The transmission and amplification of the optical signals are then completed. The optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station that adds or drops two wavelengths is supported.694. and the signal rate can be monitored. the expansion of add/drop channels is realized.1 can be added or dropped. The ROP board receives optical signals from the line side. whose functions are described as follows. When intermediate ports are cascaded with other OADM boards. Supports standard CWDM wavelengths.5 Built-in WDM Technology The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Function 2. The ROPA system consists of the BA optical amplifier board. A 1+1 inter-board standby scheme is supported.6 ROPA System The equipment supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals in a long distance. The add/drop carrier wavelengths can be labeled and queried. with the operating wavelength ranging from 1535. which then can be multiplexed or demultiplexed. clock recovery is available. One board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection. The optical signals are then sent to the SF16 board.61 nm. The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) station that adds or drops two/four wavelengths is supported.7 Gbit/s). which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-13 . l l l l l l l l l 2. l Any two adjacent standard wavelengths (with 100-GHz spacing) that comply with ITU-T G. and filter isolating board (FIB). with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms. and sends them to the FIB board for filtering and isolation.82 nm to 1560. Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. During the conversion. Figure 2-6 shows a typical ROPA system. The 3R (regeneration. Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2. The transmission distance of optical signals is extended if the ROPA system is used in the OptiX OSN 3500 system. The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.

When the optical signals recover.9 Extended Subrack The OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services and 24 x E3/T3 services. 2. the system provides the IPA function. Several seconds later.7 Intelligent Power Adjustment The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function. the system detects the signal loss and shuts down the uplink optical amplifier.652 fiber 铒纤 Erbium G. The IPA function is used to shut down the pump laser when the receiving side of the line board detects no input of signals. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function of external clock output shutdown. external clock signals are output by default. the damage to eyes by too much laser power is avoided. In a transmission system.2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 2-6 ROPA System SF16 SF16 BA17 BA G. the current configuration status of the NE software can also be queried. equipment degrade or connector disconnection. To prevent the damage to human bodies.8 External Clock Output Shutdown Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the external clock output shutdown function. the laser of the downlink optical amplifier is also shut down. the software cannot automatically recover the clock output unless the T2000 issues a command to disable the function. Moreover. In addition. Each OptiX OSN 3500 subrack supports only one extended subrack. no external clock signals are output.652 fiber ROP FIB SF16 SF16 2. especially eyes. the optical signals in optical paths may be lost because of a fiber cut. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection for E1/T1 services and 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services. Therefore. In other words. 2. the external clock output shutdown function is not enabled. When the function is performed. the optical amplifier resumes working. When the optical signals in the one or several optical trunk sections of the main optical path are lost. 2-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the IPA function. Table 2-6 lists the configuration of the extended subrack. Users can use the T2000 to issue a command to the cross-connect board to shut down or recover the two external T4 external clock outputs. By default.

N1LWX. This board is required. The EXT interface on the N1AUX board of the main subrack is connected to the "EXT" interface of the N1AUX board of the extended subrack to transmit the network management information. It is required. BA2. The N3GSCC board is required. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-15 AUX PIU PIU PIU PIU .1+1 N1IXCSB board is required. It is required. N1TSB4. N1PD3. Just replace the N1UXCSB board in Figure 2-7 with the N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board. This board is required. It is required. Figure 2-7 shows the connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack. the J9 jumper cap of the N1AUX board should be removed. hot backup is recommended. N1DCU. N1D34S. Figure 2-7 Connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack 19 20 21 2223 2425 26 27 28 29 3031 3233 3435 36 37 EXT 19 2021 2223 2425 26 27 28 29 3031 3233 34 35 36 37 EXT AUX FAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FAN FAN 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 GSCC GSCC FAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FAN 10 FAN 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 UXCSB 10 UXCSB XCE EXB EXA EXB EXA EXB EXA EXB EXA XCE Primary subrack Extended subrack 2. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. N1D12B. cables are connected in the same way.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Function Table 2-6 Configuration of the extended subrack Subrack Cross-connect and timing board SCC Service processing board Primary Subrack Extended Subrack The N1UXCSB. Support N1PQ1. Service processing boards are configured according to the actual demands. N1D75S. N1TSB8. N1PL3A. N1C34S. N2PD3. N2PQ1.1+1 hot backup is recommended. N2PL3A. BPA.10 Board REG Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the board REG function. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. N1PL3. N1D12S. N2DCU. N1PQM. N2PL3. N1SXCSB or The N1XCE board is required. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. N1PIU N1AUX FAN This board is required. When the N1AUX board is used in an extended subrack. The SCC board needs not be configured. If the N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board is used. The N1UXCSB board of the main subrack and the N1XCE board of the extended subrack are connected by two cables to achieve 1+1 protection.

See Figure 2-8. L-16. Table 2-8 Optical interfaces for the REG Board N1SL64. L-64.2Je. Ls-64.2. V-16. 11–13 Slots 6–8. 11 Slots 6–8.2Je 2-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .2Je. 11–14 Description N1SL64.2.2b Ue-64.2c.2c. Ue-64. 11–12 Slots 5–8. Figure 2-8 Hybrid application of ADM and REG REG SL64 IN SL64 OUT SL64 OUT SL64 IN OSN 3500 OUT IN IN OUT OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 3500 IN OUT OUT IN OSN 3500 OUT IN IN OUT OSN 3500 PQ1 SL16 SL16 SL16 SL16 ADM Table 2-7 lists the boards that support the REG function. V-16.2b. Ue-16.11–12 Slots 5–8. Ue-64. L-16.2. 11–13 Slots 8. With the REG mode enabled.2. Le-64.2d. Table 2-7 Boards that support the REG function Board Slot (40 Gbit/s Cross-Connect Capacity) Slots 8.2d. N3SL16 N3SL16A The T2000 must be used to enable the REG mode of boards.2Je.2Je L-16.2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of ADM and REG. the board is in the RS loopback mode and only processes the regeneration section overhead and the frame header.2f L-16.2b. Ue-16.2.2e Ue-16.2Je. N2SL64 N1SF64 N1SF16 N2SL16 N3SL16 Optical Interface Type I-64. 11–14 Slots 5–8. 11–13 Slot (80 Gbit/s Cross-Connect Capacity) Slots 7–8. V-64. U-16. S-64. U-16. 11 Slots 6–8. 11–14 Slots 7–8.N2SL64 N1SF16 N1SF64 N2SL16. Table 2-8 lists the types of optical interfaces that are supported.

2.2 Network Level Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes. 2.1 Equipment Level Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.11.1 Equipment Level Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes. L-16. 2. Table 2-9 shows the equipment level protection provided by the OptiX OSN 3500. S-16.1.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Function Board N3SL16A Optical Interface Type I-16. Table 2-9 Equipment level protection Object Protected E1/T1 service processing board E3/T3/E4/STM-1(e) service processing board DDN service processing board Ethernet processing boards N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 Ethernet processing board N1EMS4 Ethernet processing board N1EGS4 ATM service processing board Cross-connect and timing unit SCC board Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board N1LWX –48 V power interface unit Protection Scheme 1:N (N≤8) TPS 1:N (N≤3) TPS 1:N (N≤8) TPS 1:1 TPS 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Intra-board protection (dual-fed and selective receiving) and inter-board protection (1+1 hot backup) 1+1 hot backup Revertive Mode Revertive Revertive Revertive Revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive - Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-17 .2 2.1.11.11. L-16.11 Protection The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

Table 2-10 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. With the extended subrack. the OptiX OSN 3500 can support coexistence of six TPS protection groups of different types. Table 2-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Network Level Protection SDH protection Protection Scheme Linear MSP MSP ring Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP. l l 2-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . Provide distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and preconfiguration. Support service level agreement (SLA).11.2 Network Level Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes.2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Object Protected Protection Scheme Revertive Mode NOTE The OptiX OSN 3500 supports coexistence of three TPS protection groups of different types.12 ASON Features The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources. 2. improving the scalability of the network. Provide traffic engineering control to guarantee load-balance traffic network wide and improve the bandwidth availability. The ASON features help the OptiX OSN 3500 to: l l l l Support automatic end-to-end service configuration. SNCMP and SNCTP) Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection Fiber-shared virtual trail protection Optical-path-shared MSP Ethernet protection ATM protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection 2. Support span protection and end-to-end service protection. Support mesh networking and protection.

The E13/M13 function has two modes: Transmux and Transmux Server. If not equipped with the intelligent software system. 2. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-19 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . l The central NE first grooms E1/T1 signals.13 TCM The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors. aggregates and reassembles these E1/T1 signals to E3/T3 signals.15 RPR The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut or a link failure. N2SL64. – 2. The RPR has the following main features: l l l Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time. N2SL1. N2SLD4. the central NE directly demaps VC-12 signals into E1/T1 signals. – – l For E1/T1 services. Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels. the mode is referred to as the Transmux Server mode.14 E13/M13 Function The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16×E1/21×T1 signals into one E3/T3 signal or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16×E1/21×T1 signals.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description NOTE 2 Function The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 3500 as required. the mode is referred to as the Transmux mode. If a VC-4 passes through several networks. – If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to local application equipment through electrical interfaces. The N2SLO1. Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the destination node. and then by using the E13/M13 function. the central NE first demaps VC-3 signals into E3/T3 signals. N2SL16. N2SLQ4. These two modes are described in detail as follows: l The remote NE transmits the E1/E3 or T1/T3 services in VC-12/VC-3 granularities to the central NE over the SDH line. For E3/T3 services. The E13/M13 function is then performed to demultiplex E3/T3 signals into E1/T1 signals. the OptiX OSN 3500 will not support the intelligent features described in this manual. N3SL16 and N3SL16A boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level. The E3/T3 signals are then output. If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to other transmission equipment over the SDH line. The central NE disassembles the received services into E1/T1 granularities. N2SLQ1. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the E13/M13 function. 2. N2SL4. the TCM method can be used to monitor the bit errors of each section.

The NE can be automatically managed. you can check if the board software versions match when the board is in service. When Ethernet is extended to the metropolitan area network (MAN) and the wide area network (WAN). Provide RPR protection. This brings the emergence of the Ethernet OAM. which is used for a unidirectional continuity check. the board software versions can be automatically updated. In this way. the operation. the maintenance intermediate point (MIP) reports alarms. The NE software is directly placed in the target directory while the board software is buffered in the CF. 2. Once a board is in service. l l The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios: 2-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . The link trace (LT) test. the board software can be automatically updated after a new board is inserted. The NE-level software then can be loaded and activated in a mass manner to simplify the operations to upgrade the NE-level software.17 Software Package Loading The software package loading is performed to upgrade and manage the NE-level software in a mass manner.16 ETH-OAM With the development of Ethernet services. administration and maintenance (OAM) of the transmission network becomes a key issue. The maintenance end point (MEP) initiates the fault detection. 2. The software package loading has the following features: l l Users load the software in a uniform operation interface. When detecting the fault. If the board software files are lost. which is used for a bidirectional continuity check. which is used to locate the faulty point. the equipment maintainability becomes more and more important. which can be accurately synchronized to the Ethernet trail that is relevant to the MIP. The Ethernet OAM is implemented in the following process. these files can be restored from the N3GSCC board. The continuity check. The Ethernet OAM has the following functions: l l l Automatic fault discovery Fault location Fault isolation The Ethernet OAM is realized through the following methods: l l l The loopback (LB) test. Also.2 Function l l OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Solve the fairness and congestion control problems. The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load only the required files. The complete software package is stored on the N3GSCC board. an auto-update is performed. If the board that is newly inserted does not match the software of the NE.

the alarms on the tributary/data board are not suppressed. l l 2. The hot fix can be used as an effective method for locating faults. Therefore. When a defect is found or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software. and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board. In this case. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. and thus improves the efficiency of solving problems. The hot fix also provides a rollback function.20 PRBS Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function.18 Hot Fix The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot fix technology. the inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem. When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board. Such Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-21 . these alarms are reported to the T2000 and are not be mistakenly suppressed. Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. without any service interruption. Such a large number of alarms can disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. The hot fix operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. An NE that provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service path is faulty. The hot fix technology has the following features: l l The hot fix solves most software problems without affecting services. If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at the service source does not generate higher order alarms). a process of replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to fix the defect or realize the new requirement. The hot fix effectively decreases the number of software versions and avoids frequent software version upgrade.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description l l l l 2 Function Upgrade of software of an NE Replacement of service boards Replacement of the SCC board Replacement of the CF card of a board 2. These new codes are referred to as a hot fix. The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line board. All these help to lower the upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks.19 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board. relevant lower order alarms on the tributary/data board are suppressed. 2. If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE.

N2PQ1. 2-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . the PRBS module is integrated on a tributary board. l The PRBS function is implemented in the following process: l For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested. the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with those of the old version board. Before the replacement. N2PL3A. l l l l l 2. For example. N2EFS0. The user queries the PRBS statistics result. or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result. the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this path. fully consider the difference of the two boards in functions. The tributary. N4EFS0. On the T2000. it cannot be replaced with the N1SL64 board. This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme. or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts the statistics. N2PL3. line. The line board to be replaced cannot have optical-path-shared MSP configured. note the following two points: l The new board may not support the functions of the original board. The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board. the PRBS function realizes the test without a real test device. Currently for OptiX OSN 3500. When using the board version replacement function.21 Board Version Replacement The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. N3SL16. N1SL64.2 Function OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description analysis can be performed for both the NE itself and the entire network.22 OAM Information Interworking OptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking. N1SXCSB. If the PRBS function is used for higher order services. line. N2EGS2 and N2EFS4. After the replacement. Any of the following three methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 3500 to transparently transmit the OAM information of third-party equipment. the PRBS module is integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board. and thus lowers the equipment cost and the maintenance cost. the user issues a loopback command on the T2000. or for the third-party equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 3500. the board version replacement function is supported by the N1SXCSA. If the N2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services. The tributary. N2PD3. refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting. l 2. For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function. The PRBS function has the following two types: l If the PRBS function is used for lower order services. During deployment or troubleshooting. N3SL16A.

23 Clock The OptiX OSN equipment supports the clock functions. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following clock functions: l l l l l l SSM clock protocol Tributary retiming Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input Line clock source Tributary clock source Three working modes – – – Tracing mode Hold-over mode Free-run mode Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-23 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description l l l 2 Function HWECC IP over DCC OSI over DCC 2.

.

2 Cabinet The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500.4 Boards The equipment supports different types of boards. A power supply box is on the top of the cabinet to access –48 V or –60 V power.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware 3 About This Chapter 3.1 Overview The OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet. 3. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1 . 3. subrack and boards. Hardware 3.3 Subrack The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.

A power supply box is on the top of the cabinet to access –48 V or –60 V power.1 Overview The OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet.2 Cabinet The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3. Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment Cabinet Subrack Board 3. subrack and boards. 3-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Figure 3-2 shows an ETSI cabinet that is 300 mm deep. Figure 3-2 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet H W D Table 3-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets. Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets Dimensions (mm) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Weight (kg) 55 79 60 84 Allowed Subrack Quantity 1 1 2 2 3-3 Huawei Technologies Proprietary .

3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Dimensions (mm) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) Weight (kg) 70 94 Allowed Subrack Quantity 2 2 NOTE All dimensions are in mm.1 Subrack Structure The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is of a two-layer structure.3. fan area and fiber routing area. 3. where 19 slots are present.3. is the slot area for interface boards.3.2 Slot Allocation The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. 3. fan area and fiber routing area. The following figure shows the directions of the width.3 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the subrack cover the subrack dimensions and weight. The subrack consists of the slot area for processing boards.1 Subrack Structure The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is of a two-layer structure. where 18 slots are present. H W D 3. slot area for interface boards.3 Subrack The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured. 3-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . The subrack consists of the slot area for processing boards. 3.3. The lower layer. 3. is the slot area for processing boards. The upper tier. the depth and the height. slot area for interface boards. Figure 3-3 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers in the subrack. Slot area for processing boards 4.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack 1 2 3 4 H W D 1. where 19 slots are present. Slot area for processing boards: This area is used to house the processing boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. is the slot area for interface boards. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5 . where 18 slots are present. The lower layer.3. l Slot area for interface boards: This area is used to house the interface boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Slot area for interface boards 2. Fan area: This area is used to house three fan modules. which dissipate heat generated by the equipment. The upper tier.2 Slot Allocation The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. Figure 3-4 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. l l l 3. Fiber routing area The functions of these areas are as follows. is the slot area for processing boards. Fan area 3.

3-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack S L O T 1 9 S L O T 2 0 S L O T 2 1 S L O T 2 2 S L O T 2 3 S L O T 2 4 S L O T 2 5 S L O T 2 6 S L O T 2 7 S L O T 2 8 S L O T 2 9 S L O T 3 0 S L O T 3 1 S L O T 3 2 S L O T 3 3 S L O T 3 4 S L O T 3 5 S L O T 3 6 S L O T 3 7 P I U P I U A U X SLOT FAN 38 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 FAN SLOT 39 SLOT FAN 40 S L O T 1 5 S L O T 1 6 S L O T 1 7 G S C C S L O T 1 8 G S C C S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 9 S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 X C S X C S Fiber Routing Slot Area for Interface Boards Slots for interface boards: slots 19–26 and 29–36 Slot Area for Processing Boards Slots for processing boards: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Other Slots l l l l l Slots for cross-connect and timing boards: slots 9–10 Slots for SCC boards: slots 17–18 (slot 17 can also house a processing board) Slots for PIU boards: slots 27–28 Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 37 Slots for fan boards: slots 38–40 Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards Slots for Processing Boards Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 13 Slot 15 Slots for Interface Boards Slots 19 and 20 Slots 23 and 24 Slots 29 and 30 Slots 33 and 34 Slots for Processing Boards Slot 3 Slot 5 Slot 14 Slot 16 Slots for Interface Boards Slots 21 and 22 Slots 25 and 26 Slots 31 and 32 Slots 35 and 36 Boards and Their Valid Slots Table 3-3 lists the boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-3 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 Board N1GXCSA N1EXCSA N1UXCSA N1UXCSB N1SXCSA N1SXCSB N1XCE Full Name Cross-connect and timing board Enhanced cross-connect and timing board Greatly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Greatly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Greatly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Greatly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Lower order cross-connect and timing board for the extended subrack SCC board SCC board Infinitetly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Infinitetly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Valid Slots Slots 9–10 Slots 9–10 Slots 9–10 Slots 9–10 Slots 9–10 Slots 9–10 Slots 59–60 N1GSCC N3GSCC N1IXCSA N1IXCSB Slots 17–18 Slots 17–18 Slots 9–10 Slots 9–10 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7 .

3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1SL64 Full Name 1 x STM-64 optical interface board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11–12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11– 12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11 N2SL64 1 x STM-64 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11–12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11– 12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11 N1SF64 1 x STM-64 optical interface board (with FEC) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11–12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11– 12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11 N1SLD64 2 x STM-64 optical interface board 1 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11–12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11– 14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11– 13 N3SL16A 3-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1SL16 Full Name 1 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11– 14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11– 13 N2SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11– 14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11– 13 N3SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11– 14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11– 13 N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board (with FEC) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11– 14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11– 13 N1SLD16 2 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11–12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11– 12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9 .

and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (for the board housed in any of slots 6–8 and 11–13. two optical interfaces can be configured). four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–5 and 14–16. four optical interfaces can be configured) N2SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–4 and 15–16. one optical interface can be configured). two optical interfaces can be configured). one optical interface can be configured). and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5–8 and 11–14. and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5–8 and 11–14. and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5–8 and 11–14. two optical interfaces can be configured). and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (for the board housed in any of slots 6–8 and 11–13.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1SLQ4 Full Name 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–4 and 15–16. four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–4 and 15–16. four optical interfaces can be configured) 3-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . two optical interfaces can be configured). four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–4 and 15–16. and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5–8 and 11–14. four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–5 and 14–16.

one optical interface can be configured). and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (for the board housed in any of slots 6–8 and 11–13. and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (for the board housed in any of slots 6–8 and 11–13. two optical interfaces can be configured) N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–5 and 14–16.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1SLD4 Full Name 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–5 and 14–16. two optical interfaces can be configured) N1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N2SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11 . one optical interface can be configured).

1–12 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–5 and 14–16. 1–12 optical interfaces can be configured) N1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N2SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 3-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5–8 and 11–14. 1–8 optical interfaces can be configured). and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (for the board housed in any of slots 6–8 and 11–13.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1SLT1 Full Name 12 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–4 and 15–16. and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5–8 and 11–14. 1–12 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–4 and 15–16. 1–4 optical interfaces can be configured). 1–8 optical interfaces can be configured).

two optical interfaces can be configured). and 35 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1SL1 Full Name 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N2SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N1SLH1 16 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16 (for the board housed in any of slots 2–5 and 13–16. and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housed in any of slots 5–8 and 11–14. 33. 33. 23. 25. 21. four optical interfaces can be configured) Slots 1–6 and 13–16 N2SLQ16 4 x STM-16 optical interface board N1SEP1 2 x STM-1 line processing board (without the interface board) 8 x STM-1 line processing board (with the interface board) 8 x STM-1 electrical interface board N1SEP N1EU08 Slots 2–5 and 13–16 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and 29–36 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19. 23. 16 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–4 and 15–16. 31. 29. and 35 N1EU04 4 x STM-1 electrical interface board Slots 19. 21. 31. 25. 29.

and 85 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19. 69. four optical interfaces can be configured). 21.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1OU08 (LC) Full Name 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and 29–36 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19. 25. 35. 23. 35. 33. 29. eight optical interfaces can be configured) 3-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . and 35 N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interface switching board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19. 35 and 36 N1TSB4 N2SLO1 4-channel electrical interface switching board 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 19 and 35 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–8 and 11–17. 23. 31. 25. 20. 20. 33. eight optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–8 and 11–17. 36. and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (for the board housed in any of slots 6–8 and 11–13. 69. 36. 31. 20. and 35 N2OU08 (SC) 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and 29–36 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19. 29. eight optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 1–5 and 14–16. 21. and 85 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19.

13– 16. and 35 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5. 52–55. 52–55. 13–16. 21. 33. 23. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13– 16 N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13– 16 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15 . 52–55.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1PQ1A Full Name 63 x E1 75-ohm processing board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 51–55 and 63–66) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13– 16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 51–55 and 63–66) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13– 16 N1PQ1B 63 x E1 120-ohm processing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 51–55 and 63–66) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13– 16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 51–55 and 63–66) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13– 16 N1MU04 N1PL3 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical interface board 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 19. 31. 52–55. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5. 13– 16. 29. 25. 13–16.

52–55. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13– 16 N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13– 16 N2PQ3 N1PL3A 12 x E3/T3 processing board 3 x E3/T3 processing board (without the interface board) Slots 2–5 and 13–16 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 13–16. 13– 16. 13–16. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5. 51–55. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N2PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board (without the interface board) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11– 17. 52–55. 11– 17. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11–17. 51–55. 13– 16. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11–17. 51–55. 52–55. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N1SPQ4 4 x E1/STM-1 processing board Slots 2–5 and 13–16 3-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . 51–55.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1PD3 Full Name 6 x E3/T3 processing board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5. 52–55.

51–31. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13– 16 N2SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 2–5 and 13–16 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-17 . 13– 16. 23. 13–16. 79. 81. 33. 21. 33. 25. 35. 83. 35.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1C34S Full Name 3 x E3/T3 electrical interface switching board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19. and 85 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19. 31. 71. 29– 36. 73. and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26. 75. 75. 21. 83. 29. 25. 51–31. 21. and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and 29–36 N2PQ1 63 x E1 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 51–55 and 63–66) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13– 16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 51–55 and 63–66) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13– 16 N1PQM 63 x E1/T1 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–5. 29. 69–76. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–5. 79. 25. 33. and 85 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19. 31. 69–76. 69. 69. 23. 23. 81. 31. 29. 29– 36. 71. and 35 N1D34S 6 x E3/T3 electrical interface switching board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26. 73.

29– 36. and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and 29–36 N1D12S 32 x E1/T1 electrical interface switching board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26. and slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (2. 69–76. 69–76. and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s). 29– 36. and slots 5–8 and 11– 14 (2.25 Gbit/s).5 Gbit/s) N1EFT8 (without the interface board) 8 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission board Slots 1–6 and 13–16 (622 Mbit/s) 3-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . 69–76. and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26. 69–76. 69–76.25 Gbit/s). 29– 36. and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and 29–36 N1D12B 32 x E1/T1 electrical interface switching board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1D75S Full Name 32 x E1 electrical interface switching board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26. 29– 36. and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2. 29– 36. and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and 29–36 N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1. and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26. 69–76.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (1. 29– 36.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1EFT8 (with the interface board) Full Name 8 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16 (1.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (1. and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13– 16 (1.5 Gbit/s) Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-19 .25 Gbit/s) Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slot 13 (1. and slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (2.25 Gbit/s) N1EFF8 N1ETF8 N1EFT8A 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board 8 x FE transparent transmission board (without the interface board) 2 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch Slots 19–26 and 29–36 Slots 19–26 and 29–36 Slots 1–8 and 11–16 (622 Mbit/s) N1EGS2 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2. and slots 5–8 and 11– 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11– 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (2.5 Gbit/s) N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s).25 Gbit/s).

31.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s). 25. and slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (1. 29.5 Gbit/ s) N4EFS0 8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13– 16 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).5 Gbit/ s) N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board Slots 19. and slot 13 (2.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1EFS4 Full Name 4 x FE Ethernet board with Lanswitch Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 (622 Mbit/s) N2EFS4 4 x FE processing board (without the interface board) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13– 16 (1. 23.25 Gbit/s) N1EFS0 N2EFS0 8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch 8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch Slots 2–5 and 13–16 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s). and 35 3-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . and slot 13 (2. 21. 33.

and slots 5–8 and 11– 14 (2. and slots 5–6 and 13– 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (1. and slots 6 and 13 (2.25 Gbit/s).5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).5 Gbit/s) Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-21 .25 Gbit/s).25 Gbit/s).5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and 15– 16 (1. and slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (2. and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2. and slots 5–6 and 13–14 (2. and slot 5 and 13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (1.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1EMS4 (with the interface board) Full Name 4 x GE and 16 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board (with the interface board) Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and 15–16 (1. and slots 5 and 13–14 (2.25 Gbit/s).5 Gbit/s) N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.5 Gbit/ s) N1EMS4 (without the interface board) 4 x GE and 16 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board (without the interface board) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s). and slot 13 (2.25 Gbit/s).

5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and 15– 16 (1.25 Gbit/s).5 Gbit/ s) 3-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . and slots 5–6 and 13– 14 (2.25 Gbit/s).25 Gbit/s).5 Gbit/s) N2EMR0 (with the interface board) 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet board with RPR Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and 15–16 (1. and slots 5 and 13–14 (2. and slots 5 and 13–14 (2.25 Gbit/s).5 Gbit/ s) N1EMR0 (without the interface board) 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet board with RPR Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s).5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and 15– 16 (1. and slots 5 and 13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s). and slot 13 (2. and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (1. and slots 5–6 and 13–14 (2. and slots 5 and 13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1EMR0 (with the interface board) Full Name 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet board with RPR Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and 15–16 (1. and slots 6 and 13 (2.25 Gbit/s).

5 Gbit/s) N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1. and slot 5–6 and 13–14 (2.25 Gbit/s).25 Gbit/s) N1ADQ1 1 x STM-4 ATM processing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (1.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N2EMR0 (without the interface board) Full Name 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet board with RPR Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 (1. and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2. and slots 6 and 13 (2.25 Gbit/s) Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-23 .25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (1. and slots 5–6 and 13– 14 (2.25 Gbit/s). and slots 5–8 and 11– 14 (2.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (1.25 Gbit/s).5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (1.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).5 Gbit/s) N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s). and slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (2.

25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 (1.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15– 16 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s). and slot 5–8 and 11– 14 (2.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s). and slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (1. and slot 5–8 and 11–14 (2.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1IDL4 Full Name 1 x STM-4 ATM processing board with IMA Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1.5 Gbit/s) N1DX1 N1DXA N x 64 kbit/s access and convergence board N x 64 kbit/s convergence and processing board Slots 1–5 and 13–16 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N1DM12 N x 64 kbit/s interface board Slots 19–26 and 29–36 3-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14– 16 (622 Mbit/s).25 Gbit/s). and slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (1.25 Gbit/s) N1MST4 4-port multiservice transparent transmission board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s).25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 (1.25 Gbit/s) N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing board with IMA Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1. and slots 6–8 and 11– 13 (2.

and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and 29–36 TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 51–58. 11–17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11– 17. 51–58. 29– 36. 11–17. and 79–86 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26. 29– 36.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1LWX Full Name Wavelength converting board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 69–76. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-25 . 11–17. 51–55. 11– 17. 69–76. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. and 63–66 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 51–58. 11– 17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N1MR2C 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26. 51–58. 51–55.

and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11– 17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical add/ drop multiplexing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11– 17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11–17. 11– 17. 11–17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/ drop multiplexing board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 17 3-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . 11– 17. 51–58. 51–58. 51–58. 51–58. 11–17. 51–58.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board TN11MR2 Full Name 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11–17. 51–58. 51–58. 51–58.

11– 17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N1BPA 1-channel amplifier and 1channel preamplifier board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11– 17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 51–58. 51–58. 11–17. 51–58. 11–17. 11–17. 51–58. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N2DCU Dispersion compensation board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 51–58. 51–58. 11– 17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N1DCU Dispersion compensation board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 51–58. 51–58. 11– 17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11–17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 N1COA/ 61COA/62COA Case-shaped optical amplifier Slots 101–102 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-27 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1BA2 Full Name Optical booster amplifier board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8.

3-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .3 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the subrack cover the subrack dimensions and weight. 62COA. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 11–17. and 61–67 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11– 16 ROP Single wavelength long-haul board (external) Slot 103 NOTE The slots for the N1COA. and ROP are logical slots rather than physical slots. 61COA. 51–58. Table 3-4 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. 11– 17.3.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1AUX Full Name System auxiliary interface board Valid Slots Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slot 37 (slot 87 in the extended subrack) Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slot 37 (slot 87 in the extended subrack) Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slot 37 N1PIU PIU board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 27–28 (slots 77–78 in the extended subrack) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 27–28 (slots 77–78 in the extended subrack) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 27 and 28 N1FAN Fan board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 38–40 (slots 88–90 in the extended subrack) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 38–40 (slots 88–90 in the extended subrack) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 38 and 40 N1FANA N1FIB Fan board Filter isolating board (passive) Slots 38–40 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8. 51–58. 3.

6 WDM Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards. 3.4.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack Dimensions (mm) 497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H) Weight (kg) 23 (net weight of the subrack without any board or fan) 3.4. 3.5 Data Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports data processing boards.3 PDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards. 3.4.4.2 SDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards.4.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards.4 DDN Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN processing boards.4. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3.4. The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the following untis: l l l l l l l l l l SDH interface unit PDH interface unit DDN interface unit Ethernet interface unit Resilient packet ring unit ATM interface unit SAN interface unit WDM unit SDH cross-connect matrix unit Synchronous timing unit Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-29 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .8 Auxiliary Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards.1 Board Type The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of some units.4 Boards The equipment supports different types of boards.4. 3.1 Board Type The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of some units.4.

N2SLQ1. N1SEP1. N1SLD4. N1SL4. N2SLO1. N1SL16. Access and process STM-16/64 optical signals with FEC. N1SLD16. N3SL16. and conducts TPS protection for them. N1SLH1. N2SLQ16. N1SF16. Access and process STM-1 electrical signals. N1OU08. N1SEP N1EU08. N1SF64. N2SLQ4. N2SL1. N1EU04 N1TSB8. N1TSB4 Function Access and process STM-1/STM-4/ STM-16/STM-64 optical signals and VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/ VC-4-64c concatenated optical signals. N2SL64. N2SL4. N1SLQ1. N1SLD64. N2OU08. N2SL16. N1SLQ4. N1SLT1. N1SL1. N2SLD4. Interface board Protection switching board 3-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary SCC Unit Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .3 Hardware l l l l l OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description SCC unit Overhead processing unit Power input unit Auxiliary interface unit Fan unit Figure 3-5 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-5 lists the constituent boards and functions of each unit. Figure 3-5 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 SDH/PDH/Ethernet/ ATM/DDN Interface board SDH Interface Unit Cross Connect Matrix STM-N Optical Signal PDH Signal Ethernet Signal ATM Signal Synchronous timing Unit Interface Unit Auxiliary Overhead Processing Unit Table 3-5 Constituent boards and functions of each unit Unit SDH interface unit Processing board Constituent Board N1SL64. N3SL16A.

N1DXA DM12 Function Access and process E1/ T1. N1EFS0. N1EFF8 N1TSB8 Interface board Protection switching board Provide TPS protection for Ethernet services of the N2EFS0 and the N4EFS0 boards. Access and transparently transmit SAN services and video services. STM-1. Access and process STM-4. N2EMR0. N2EGS2. N2EGR2 N1ETF8. EFT8A. N1EMS4. N2EFS0. Access and process 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX. N1D75S. N2PD3. N1IDL4. Access and process 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX. and 10/100Base-TX Ethernet signals. N1PQ1. N2PL3A. N1EGT2. N1EFT8. N1IDQ1 N1MST4 SAN interface unit Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-31 . N1EGS4 N1ETS8 (with the TPS function). N1ADQ1. Interface board Protection switching board DDN interface unit Processing board Interface board Access and process N x 64 kbit/s (N: 1–31) signals and framed E1 signals. N2SPQ4. N1D12B N1TSB8. RPR unit Processing board Interface board N1EMR0. N1PL3. and 10/100Base-TX Ethernet signals. Ethernet interface unit Processing board N1EGS2. N1C34S. E3/T3 and E4/ STM-1 PDH electrical signals. N4EFS0. N1TSB4 N1DX1. N1D34S. N1PD3. N1PQM. E3 and IMA E1 ATM signals. N1EFF8 ATM interface unit N1ADL4. N1EFS4. and provide TPS protection for them. 100Base-FX. Cross-connect the N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side and provide TPS protection for them. 100Base-FX. N2PQ3. N1PL3A.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Unit PDH interface unit Processing board Constituent Board N1SPQ4. N1D12S. N2EFS4. N2PQ1 N1MU04. Support RPR features. N2PL3. N1ETF8.

N1FANA TN11OBU1. N2DCU 3-32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . TN11CMR4 N1LWX Function Add/drop and multiplex any two adjacent wavelengths. 62COA N1DCU. N1BPA. N1UXCSA.7 Gbit/s NRZ-coded signals). ROP.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Unit WDM unit Constituent Board N1MR2A. Dissipate heat for the system. Perform the system control and communication function. N1EXCSA. N1COA. 61COA. TN11MR4. SDH cross-connect matrix unit Synchronous timing unit N1SXCSA. N1GXCSA. Provide system clock for the equipment. TN11CMR2.692. Auxiliary interface unit N1AUX Fan unit Optical booster amplifier and dispersion compensation unit Optical amplifier board Dispersion compensation board N1FAN. Cross-connect SDH and PDH signals. N1FIB The N1FIB board filters and isolates the optical signals output from the ROP board. N1XCEb N1GSCC. Compensate dispersion for STM-64 optical signals. N1UXCSB. Process overhead of SDH signals. N1MR2C. N1BA2. N3GSCC SCC unit Overhead processing unit Power interface unit N1PIU Access power supply and protect the equipment against abnormal power. Amplify and preamplify the optical power. Convert client-side wavelengths to standard wavelengths that are compliant with ITU-T G. Provide various administration and maintenance interfaces. N1SXCSB. Access signals at arbitrary bit rates (34 Mbit/s to 2. TN11MR2.

1.4. S-64. L-16.2Je.1. V-64.2. Ue-16.2b Ue-64. Ue-16. S-16.2b. V-16.2 LC N1SF16 Ue-16.2e Conne ctor LC N2SL64 LC N1SF64 LC N1SLD64 I-64.1. L-16. L-64.2d. V-16.2b LC N1SLD16 I-16.2Je. S-16.2Je LC N3SL16 L-16. V-16.2f LC N2SLQ16 I-16.2. Table 3-6 SDH processing boards Board N1SL64 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interface Type I-64.2d.1.2.2.2Je. Le-64.2 SDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards.1.2. S-16. Ue-64.2Je.2Je LC N3SL16A I-16.2Je LC N2SL16 L-16. L-16. L-16. Ls-64.1. L-16. Ue-64.2Je.2. L-16. L-16. Ls-64. S-64. Le-64.2.2c.2b. S-64. V-64. U-16.1. U-16.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware 3.2b. U-16. L-16.2b. L-64.2 LC N1SL16 L-16.2b I-64.2c. L-16. Table 3-6 lists the SDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 3500.2.2Je.2.2 LC Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-33 .

2. Ve-4.1. Ve-4.2 LC N2SL4 I-4. Ve-4. S-4.1.2 LC N1SLD4 I-4. S-4.2.2.1.1. Ve-1.1. L-1. L-4. S-1.1. Ve-4.2. L-4.1. Ve-1. L-4.2 LC N1SLT1 S-1.1. L-4. S-1. L-4.2. L-1. S-4.1 LC N1SLH1 - LC N1SLQ1 I-1. S-4.2.1.2.2.2. L-1.1. L-1. Ve-1.2 Conne ctor LC N2SLQ4 I-4.1.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1SLQ4 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interface Type I-4.2.1.2 LC N1SEP1a 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface BNC 3-34 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . L-4.1.2 LC N2SLQ1 I-1. L-4. Ve-4. L-4. S-1. L-4. Ve-1.1.2 LC N2SLD4 I-4.1. L-4.1.1.2 LC N1SL4 I-4.1. S-1.2 LC N1SL1 I-1. L-1. L-4. Ve-4. L-4. L-1.2 LC N2SL1 I-1.1. L-1. L-1.1. S-4. S-4.

1. S-1. L-1. Table 3-7 shows the PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 3500. Ie-1. they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. When they provide interfaces on the front panel. Ie-1.1 SC 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface BNC N2SLO1 Interfaces available on the front panel I-1. L-1. Ve-1.2 LC a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are the boards of the same type.4. S-1. Table 3-7 PDH processing boards Board N1SPQ4 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical interface board: N1MU04 Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical interface board: N1MU04 6 x electrical interface switching board: N1D34S 6 x electrical interface switching board: N1D34S 3 x electrical interface switching board: N1C34S Interface Type 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface Connect or BNC N2SPQ4 BNC N1PD N2PD3 N1PL3 BNC BNC BNC Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-35 . 3.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1SEPa Interfacing Mode 8 x STM-1 line processing board: N1OU08 8 x STM-1 line processing board: N2OU08 8 x STM-1 line processing board: N1EU08 Interface Type I-1. Ie-1.2. When they are used with the interface board. they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.1.1 Conne ctor LC I-1. S-1.3 PDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards.

Table 3-8 lists the DDN processing boards. EIA530. 100ohm T1 interface DB44 N2PQ1A 75-ohm E1 interface DB44 N2PQ1B 120-ohm E1 interface DB44 3. EIA530-A. V. Framed E1 Connect or DB28.24. V.21.35. RS449. DB44 3-36 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1PL3A N2PL3 N2PL3A N2PQ3 N1PQ1A Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel 3 x electrical interface switching board: N1C34S Interfaces available on the front panel 6 x electrical interface switching board: N1D34S Interfaces available on the 32channel 75-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D75S Interfaces available on the 32channel 120-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D12S Interfaces available on the 32channel 120-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D12S nterfaces available on the 32channel 75-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D75S Interfaces available on the 32channel 120-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D12S Interface Type 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E1 interface Connect or BNC BNC BNC BNC DB44 N1PQ1B 120-ohm E1 interface DB44 N1PQM 120-ohm E1 interface. Table 3-8 DDN processing boards Board N1DX1 Full Name N x 64 kbit/s service access and convergence board Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the N x 64 kbit/s interface board N1DM12 Interface Type RS232. X.4.4 DDN Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN processing boards.

N1EFF8 N4EFS0 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board. Table 3-9 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. N1EFF8 N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interface Type 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100Base-TX Connector LC LC RJ-45 100Base-FX LC 10/100Base-TX RJ-45 100Base-FX LC 10/100Base-TX RJ-45 100Base-FX LC 10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX RJ-45 RJ-45 LC Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-37 . N1EFF8 N2EFS0 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board. Table 3-9 Data processing boards and their interfaces Board N1EGS2 N2EGS2 N1EFS0 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.5 Data Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports data processing boards.4.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware Board N1DXA Full Name N x 64 kbit/s service convergence board Interfacing Mode None Interface Type None Connect or None 3.

L-1.1.2.1. L-1.1. N1EFF8 Interface Type 10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX Connector RJ-45 RJ-45 100Base-FX LC N1EFT8A N1EMS4 Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel and the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board.1. N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board. Ve-4. N1EFF8 100Base-FX LC N2EGR2 N1ADL4 N1ADQ1 N1IDL4 N1IDQ1 N1MST4 Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX S-4.2. L-4.1.2. L-1. Ve-4. L-4. N1EFF8 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX RJ-45 RJ-45 100Base-FX.2. Ve-1.2 S-4. L-4. Ve-1. N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board N1EFT8 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board. S-1.1.1. L-1.1. 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100Base-TX LC LC LC LC RJ-45 N1EGS4 N1EMR0 and N2EMR0 Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board.2 - LC LC LC LC LC LC 3-38 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .2 Ie-1. N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board. L-4.2 Ie-1. S-1.

Table 3-11 lists the optical booster amplifier boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. E2000 LC Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-39 . E2000 LC LC LC. N2DCU ROP N1FIB TN11OBU1 Full Name Optical booster amplifier board Optical booster and pre-amplifier board Case-shaped erbium doped fiber amplifier unit Case-shaped single-channel pre-amplifier unit Case-shaped fiber Raman amplifier unit Dispersion compensation unit Remote optical pumping board Wavelength filter and isolating board (passive.6 WDM Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards. Table 3-10 WDM boards and theri interfaces Board N1MR2A N1MR2B N1MR2C N1LWX TN11MR2 TN11MR4 TN11CMR2 TN11CMR4 Full Name 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 4-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board Interface Type LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC 3. Table 3-10 lists the WDM boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-11 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces Board N1BA2 N1BPA 61COA N1COA 62COA N1DCU.4.4. used with the ROP) Optical booster amplifier board Interface Type LC LC SC SC SC.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 Hardware 3.

8 Auxiliary Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards.3 Hardware OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 3. Table 3-12 lists the auxiliary boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. RJ-45 3-40 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .4. Table 3-12 Auxiliary boards and theri interfaces Board N1PIU N1FAN N1FANA N1AUX Full Name Power interface unit Fan control board Full-speed fan board System auxiliary interface and orderwire phone processing board Interface Type None None None BNC.

The NE software also serves as the communication unit between the T2000 system and the boards. 4. monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE.2 Board Software The board software runs on each board. monitors and controls the operation of the board. Through the NE software.4 T2000 System The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-1 . and transport plane. 4. Software The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 includes NE software and board software.3 NE Software The NE software is used to manage. the T2000 system can control and manage NEs.5 ASON Software According to ITU-T Recommendations. an automatically switched optical network (ASON) includes three planes: control plane. and manages. 4. management plane.1 Overview The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is of a modular structure.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Software 4 About This Chapter 4. 4.

and communication management. and manages. The software system includes the following modules: l l l l Board software (residing in each relevant board) NE software (residing in the SCC board) T2000 software (residing on a T2000 computer) ASON software (contained in the NE software) The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is as shown in Figure 4-1.1 Overview The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is of a modular structure. The board software directly controls the functional modules in a board and implements specific NE functions that are compliant with ITU-T Recommendations. The board software is mainly classified into the line software.4 Software OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 4. The board software functions include alarm management. the tributary software. The board software receives the commands issued by the NE software and reports the board status to the NE software in the form of performance events and alarms. performance management. and the orderwire software. The board software provides support for the management of boards performed by the NE software. 4. but it needs the NE software as a vehicle to intercommunicate with the board software. the data board software. the clock software. configuration management.2 Board Software The board software runs on each board. monitors and controls the operation of the board. the crossconnect software. 4-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 T2000 software NE software ASON software Board software NOTE The ASON software can interact with the T2000 software directly.

Network Side (NS) Module The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management module. The NE software also serves as the communication unit between the T2000 system and the boards. the alarm management module.3 NE Software The NE software is used to manage.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Software 4. and includes the Manager and the Agent. In compliance with ITU-T M. the T2000 system can control and manage NEs. The NE software consists of the following modules: l l l l l Real-time multitask operating system Network side (NS) module Equipment administration module (AM) Communication module Database management module Real-Time Multitask Operating System The real-time multitask operating system of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE software is responsible for the management of public resources and provides support for the execution of applications. and reports events according to the status change of the managed objects. The data communication function implements the communication between the NE and other components (including equipment.3010. and the MSP switching management module. The Agent responds to the network management operation commands sent by the Manager. performs operations to managed objects. the T2000 system. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-3 . some coordination functions. and other NEs). the NS module is divided into the following three submodules: l l l Qx interface module Command line interface module Security management module Equipment Administration Module (AM) The equipment AM is the kernel of the NE software for implementing NE management. the performance management module. The Manager sends network management operation commands and receives event information. monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE. to separate applications from the processor. The equipment AM includes the configuration management module. and operations system functions at the network element layer. the NE software belongs to the element management layer in the telecommunications management network (TMN). and provides NE functions. and provides security control for the NE layer. This system provides an application execution environment that is independent of the processor hardware. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer. Functionally. Through the NE software.

the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. check. the serial communication module. includes the network database. Database Management Module The database management module is an integral component of the NE software. and enables the user to browse. NE user management. Metro. NE login management. browsing. SDH. l Security management The T2000 realizes NM user management. NE login lockout. and between NEs themselves. clearing. and local craft terminal (LCT) access control. counting. 4-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . DWDM equipment in the network. l Configuration management The T2000 enables the user to configure and manage interfaces. analyze. which adopts a management protocol specially designed for the OptiX equipment. and the ECC communication module. The T2000 software runs on a workstation or a PC. the communication module transmits the OAM&P information and exchanges management information between the T2000 system and NEs. The T2000 software manages OptiX equipment through the Qx interface. and to maintain all OSN. and equipment database. NE setting lockout. organized as a relational database. prompting. 4. The management system manages and accesses the data in the database. l Alarm management The T2000 realizes the following alarm management functions: real-time collection. but also to manage the transmission network. alarm database. and time. acknowledgement. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations. trails. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module. This module consists of the network communication module. to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment. The medium-term and long-term performance forecast and the performance register reset are also supported. alarm correlation analysis. performance database. and consists of the data and the management system.4 T2000 System The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). The database. The OptiX iManager T2000 is used as a network management system to implement a uniform management of the optical transmission network. Through the hardware interface provided by the SCC board. clocks.4 Software OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Communication Module The communication module fulfills the message communication function (MCF) of the functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. and print performance data. The T2000 enables the user not only to operate and maintain transmission equipment. protections. filtering. services. and fault diagnosis. l Performance management The T2000 realizes the setting of performance monitoring. alarm insertion.

the signaling module provides the following functions: l l Set up or tear down service connections according to user requests. OSPF-TE. and uses the LMP. the signaling module. Verify member links and TE links. The ASON software mainly includes the link management module (which uses the link management protocol — LMP). and the cross-connection management module. Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. and RSVP-TE protocols. automatic laser shutdown (ALS). board reset. the routing module. and optical power detection. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description l 4 Software Maintenance management The T2000 provides the loopback. The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. management plane. to help maintenance personnel in troubleshooting. 4. and transport plane. The control plane is where the ASON software is applied. Signaling Module Using the RSVP-TE protocol. Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes. an automatically switched optical network (ASON) includes three planes: control plane. and data collection functions. the link management module provides the following functions: l l Create and maintain control channels. Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture AOSN software T2000 Signaling module Cross-connection management module NE software Routing module LMP link management module Link Management Module Using the LMP protocol. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-5 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .5 ASON Software According to ITU-T Recommendations.

Compute service trails and control the routing. Cross-Connection Management Module The cross-connection management module provides the following functions: l l Create and delete cross-connections. and other relevant information. the routing module provides the following functions: l l l Collect and flood the TE link information. 4-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . Report link status. alarms.4 Software OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Routing Module Using the OSPF-TE protocol. Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.

SAN features and DDN features. application and protection.5 DDN Features This section describes the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions and application. application and protection. RPR features. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-1 . 5. FICON.3 ATM Features This section describes the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features 5 About This Chapter Data Features The data features include Ethernet features.1 Ethernet Features This section describes the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions. 5. ATM features. 5. application and protection.4 SAN Features The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board. 5. 5. to access and transparently transmit FC.2 RPR Features This section describes the RPR features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions. ESCON and DVB-ASI services. N1MST4.

3 Protection The protection schemes for Ethernet services include LCAS and LAG. and N1EFT8A to meet different Ethernet service requirements. N2EGS2. N2EFS0. 100Base-FX Interface board None None N1ETS8 (cooperating with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS). N1ETF8. N1EFS0. VC-12-xv (x≤63). 100BaseFX N1ETF8. N2EFS0.1. N1EFF8 Service frame format JUMBO frame Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs Ethernet II.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5.2 Application The OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. IEEE 802. Table 5-2. 5. Table 5-1. 5.1 Ethernet Features This section describes the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions. N1EFS0. N1EFT8. Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0 Function Interface Interface type N1EFS4 4 FE 10Base-T. VC-3-xv (x≤12) 12 24 12 24 24 5-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the Ethernet boards N1EFS4. 5. VC-3. N4EFS0. 100BaseTX N1EFS0 8 FE 10Base-T. application and protection. 100BaseTX N2EFS4 4 FE 10Base-T. and N1EFT8A to meet different Ethernet service requirements. N2EGS2. 9600 bytes 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4 VC-12. IEEE 802. 100Base-TX. N1EFF8 N2EFS0 8 FE 10Base-T.3. N2EFS4. 5. 100BaseTX. N1EGS2. N4EFS0.1.1. N1EGT2. 100Base-FX N4EFS0 8 FE 10Base-T. N1EGS2. N1EGT2. Table 5-3 and Table 5-4 list the Ethernet functions of these boards.1 q/p Supported. N2EFS4.1.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the Ethernet boards N1EFS4. N1EFT8. 100Base-TX.

3X Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported Supported Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2 Function Interface Interface type Issue 01 (2007-06-15) N1EGS2 2 GE N2EGS2 1000Base-SX. 1000Base-ZX Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-3 . 1000Base-LX.1q/p Supported Supported Generic framing procedure (GFP) Supported ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s) Not supported IEEE 802.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features Function Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation Link state pass through (LPT) Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Committed access rate (CAR) Intra-board port aggregation Flow control Test frame Ethernet performance monitoring RMON N1EFS4 Supported Supported Supported Supported N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0 MartinioE label supported Supported IEEE 802.

5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Function Interface board Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR Flow control Intra-board port aggregation Test frame Ethernet performance monitoring RMON N1EGS2 None N2EGS2 Ethernet II. IEEE 802. VC-12-xv (x≤63). VC-3-xv (x≤12) 24 Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported IEEE 802. VC-3. IEEE 802. 9600 bytes 8 VC-4 16 VC-4 VC-12.3.3X Not supported Supported Supported Supported Supported 5-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .1 q/p Supported.7042 Supported Supported Supported MartinioE label supported Supported Supported 48 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s) IEEE 802.1q/p Not supported Not supported GFP Supported Not supported ITU-T G.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

5 Data Features

Table 5-3 Function list of N1EGT2, N1EFT8, and N1EFT8A Function Interface Interface type N1EGT2 2 GE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX None N1EFT8 16 FE 10Base-T, 100BaseTX, 100Base-FX Supports 8 x FE if not used with an interface board.Supports 16 x FE if used with interface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8. N1EFT8A 8 FE 10Base-T, 100Base-TX None

Interface board

Service frame format JUMBO frame

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv (x≤8) 2 Supported by the latter four ports, 9600 bytes 8 VC-4 Supported by the latter four ports, 9600 bytes 4 VC-4

Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode

VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤3) 16 8

Number of VCTRUNKs Ethernet service types MPLS VLAN Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR Flow control Test frame Ethernet performance monitoring

Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported Not supported Transparent transmission GFP, LAPS, HDLC Not supported ITU-T G.7042 Not supported IEEE 802.3X Supported Supported

Table 5-4 Function list of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Function Interface N1EMS4 4 GE and 16 FE N1EGS4 4 GE

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-5

5 Data Features

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Function Interface type

N1EMS4 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX Supports 4 x GE if not used with an interface board. Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if used with interface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.

N1EGS4 1000Base-SX, 1000BaseLX, 1000Base-ZX None

Interface board

Protection Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping

Supports 1+1 intra-board protection and port level protection. Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9216 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv (x≤8) 64 Supported Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services. Supported Not supported Not supported Supports VLAN and QinQ. Supports the adding, deletion and exchange of VLAN labels, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supported Supported GFP, LAPS, HDLC Supported ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s) Supports port flow and port+VLAN flow. Supported Supported

5-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

5 Data Features

Function Flow control Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM Test frame Service mirroring Link aggregation

N1EMS4

N1EGS4

Supports IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control, based on GE/FE port. Supported

Supported Supported Supported Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.

5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l l l l

EPL Service EVPL Service EPLAN Service EVPLAN Service

EPL Service
There are two types of EPL services.
l

EPL service based on port

The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH selfhealing ring (SHR). In this way, the secure and reliable transmission is guaranteed. Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port

NE 4 1 4 NE 1 5 2 NE 2

SHR

NE 3 3

n

Traffic flow

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-7

5 Data Features
l

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

EPL service based on port+VLAN

EPL services can be isolated by VLAN tags when these services share a VCTRUNK bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to the port and VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs of Companies A and B. A maximum of two priorities can be set according to the traffic classification result. For security purpose, the OptiX OSN 3500 isolates services of different users by VLANs. In Figure 5-2, VLAN 1 of Company A shares a VCTRUNK with VLAN 11 of Company B, VLAN 2 of Company A shares a VCTRUNK with VLAN 12 of Company B, and VLAN 3 of Company A shares a VCTRUNK with VLAN 13 of Company B. All services of Company A are converged to NE1 and then sent through an FE/GE interface of NE1 to the Lanswitch for further processing. Figure 5-2 EPL service based on port+VLAN
Headquarters of Company A
VLAN 3 VLAN 2 VLAN 11 VLAN 12

Headquarters of Company B

VLAN 1

VLAN 13

NE 1
VLAN 1 VLAN 3

Branch
VLAN 11

NE 2

1

3 2

NE 4
VLAN 13

SHR
NE 3

Branch

VLAN 2

VLAN 12

n

Traffic flow

Branch

EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the Martini MPLS L2 VPN encapsulation format to support EVPL services. An EVPL service offers point-to-point connection and implements service convergence for users. As shown in Figure 5-3, the system searches the port+VLAN ID table for the external label (Tunnel) and the internal label (VC), and encapsulates them into the accessed data frames. In the network, data forwarding is based on the external label. In the last-hop provider edge (PE) equipment, the external and internal labels are stripped, and data forwarding at the egress port is based on these labels. The OptiX OSN 3500 contains the functions of both provider (P) and provider edge (PE) equipment.
NOTE

PE equipment is used to interconnect user equipment and to access user services. P equipment is used for the routing function and the forwarding of MPLS encapsulated services.

5-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

. the maintenance and management of equipment becomes easy for the operator. 60 70 .. In addition. and the bandwidth utilization is improved. For example. the system configuration is simplified. 10 20 . .. The Ethernet Layer 2 switching function provided by the OptiX OSN 3500 can be employed to solve this problem. This is referred to as the EPLAN service. Then.. which can be transferred according to its destination media access control (MAC) address.. The Ethernet services among the four NEs are not of a fixed point-to-point type.. if a user of Company A connected to NE3 needs to communicate with users of Company A connected to the other three NEs. respective LANs of Companies A and B are connected to four NEs. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-9 . .. the data of Companies A and B accessed at NE3 can be transmitted to their destinations over either the same VCTRUNK or different VCTRUNKs.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features Figure 5-3 EVPL service Company A 60 PE1 PortA PortB 70 10 20 Data Data 60 P P 70 10 20 Data Data PE2 Company A PortA PortB Tunnel VC label adding/stripping Tunnel Tunnel Company TunnelLable VC Label Data L2 MPLS network composed by OptiX OSN Product Tunnel VC label adding/stripping Company B A B . . As shown in Figure 5-4. after relevant settings on NE3. the system sets up a MAC address table that can be periodically updated by self-learning. . EPLAN Service The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data.. For example. In this way. according to their respective MAC address tables. the service flow directions are not fixed....

After a search in the Layer 2 MAC address table. As a result. The EVPLAN service implements the multipoint-to-multipoint connection of user sites. When the data frame goes out of the PE equipment. and the destination address is MAC A. the Tunnel and VC labels are stripped. As shown in Figure 5-5. the system searches the Layer 2 MAC address table.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 5-4 EPLAN service Company A Company B NE1 NE2 Company A 3 Company B 2 1 NE4 Company A NE3 Company B VC-Trunk MAC Address MAC 1 NE1 ① MAC 2 NE4 ② NE2 MAC 3 ③ … … … Company A Company B n Traffic flow EVPLAN Service The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the MPLS encapsulation format to support EVPLAN services. the Ethernet frame is forwarded to the relevant egress port according to its destination address. B or C) enters the PE equipment. different label switch paths (LSPs) are set up depending on the addresses. the EVPLAN network is a big VLAN where the user services can be converged. and obtains the external label (Tunnel label) and the internal label (VC label). when the user’s data frame (the source address is MAC H. 5-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . From the viewpoint of user.

such as MSP. SNCP. and the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged during the dynamic change). Services are not interrupted during such bandwidth adjustment. the LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity. SNCMP. the LCAS can dynamically add or delete members to increase or decrease the bandwidth.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features Figure 5-5 EVPLAN service P MPLS Core PE Address = MAC C P Address = MAC A PE Branch A LSP3 LSP1 PE Branch C Address = MAC B PE Branch B LSP2 Transferd to corresponding port via the Layer 2 route table Address = MAC H Source MAC H MAC H MAC H Sink MAC A MAC B MAC C Tunnel Label VC Label LSP 1 2 3 10 20 30 LSP1 LSP2 LSP3 Headquarters 5.3 Protection The protection schemes for Ethernet services include LCAS and LAG. including: l l l l l l l l LCAS STP/RSTP Tributary protection switching (TPS) Board protection switching (BPS) Port protection switching (PPS) Link aggregation group (LAG) Optical transmission layer protections. The LCAS protects and restores failed members. The LCAS has the following functions: l When the LCAS is applied in the virtual concatenation technology. and SNCTP LPT LCAS The LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the virtual concatenation function.1. the increase and decrease of the concatenated VC quantity. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-11 . l As shown in Figure 5-6. The Ethernet services of the OptiX OSN equipment are protected by various protection schemes.

the LCAS realizes the protection of the Ethernet service. the faulty members are automatically deleted.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 5-6 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS I want another 10 M bandwidth. and the data is loaded to these members again. while other members keep transmitting data normally. Figure 5-7 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS MSTP network Member Member Branch Failed member Headquarters Member Member Branch Headquarters Delete failed member MSTP STP/RSTP The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). When some members fail. 5-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . When the STP or the RSTP is started. it logically modifies the network topology to avoid a broadcast storm. they are automatically restored. MSTP network Member Member Branch Headquarters Member Member Branch New member Headquarters MSTP As shown in Figure 5-7. When the faulty members are available again. The STP or the RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology.

without upgrade the existing equipment. Support link aggregation. or detects a board hardware failure. The N1EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the PPS. In an LAG. the user is able to obtain a data link of higher bandwidth. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port. Members in an LAG dynamically back up each other. Balance load. members dynamically back up each other. When multiple physical links are bundled. Compared with the BPS. SNCP. to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP. SNCMP and SNCTP At the optical transmission layer. Improve the reliability. other members quickly take over. In this way. The N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards support link aggregation. In this case. a reliable operation of the equipment is ensured.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features TPS The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. BPS The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-13 . PPS The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. The capacity of an LAG equals the sum of the capacity of all member links. The LAG provides the following functions: l Improve the link availability. The LAG is an economic way for the user to increase the link transmission rate. the cross-connect board switches all services from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection. a protection switching for the entire board is not necessary. l l l l MSP. and currently support manual aggregation and static aggregation. the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected ports to the standby boards. When one link is interrupted. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port. When a protected board becomes faulty. SNCP. An LAG can be regarded as one link. LAG A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same equipment. Multiple physical links in an LAG share the traffic load and back up each other. or detects a board hardware failure. the PPS has less impact on external systems and the network. SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. The N1EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the BPS. its services are switched to the protection board. Add the link bandwidth. The OSN 3500 supports two groups of 1:1 TPS protection for the N2EFS0 or N4EFS0 board.

spatial reuse and fairness algorithm. As a result.2 Application The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.2.1 Functions The RPR functions cover the basic functions. the LPT function is available for protection. topology auto-discovery. 5.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description LPT The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. service class. When the working link becomes faulty. application and protection.2 RPR Features This section describes the RPR features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions. when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links.17 employs a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in reverse directions.2.1 Functions The RPR functions cover the basic functions. and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The two rings protect each other. 5-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Inner ring data Inner ring control Node 3 5. as shown in Figure 5-8. 5. The RPR defined by IEEE 802. services are switched from the active port to the standby port and are thus protected.2. spatial reuse and fairness algorithm. the bandwidth utilization is increased.2. 5. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring. topology auto-discovery. Figure 5-8 RPR ring Node 1 Outer ring data Outer ring control Node 2 2. service class. the LPT function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. In a network. Hence. Both the outer ring and the inner ring transmit data packets and control packets. 5.3 Protection The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes.

Table 5-5 lists the basic functions of RPR boards.1QTAG Supported. compliant with ITU-T X. compliant with IEEE 802.86. wrapping+steering protection schemes. port+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.3X The N1EMR0 board supports traffic classification based on port. GFP-F. with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms. deletion.3. Table 5-5 Function list of RPR boards Function Boards N1EMR0 Interface Service frame format JUMBO frame Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping granularity EVPL EVPLAN Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN Spanning tree Multicast listening (IGMP Snooping) RPR protection Encapsulation 1 GE and 12 FE N2EMR0 1 GE and 12 FE N2EGR2 2 GE Ethernet II. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-15 . LAPS. compliant with IEEE 802. as well as the adding. IEEE 802. or port+VLAN PRI. Supports RSTP Supported Supports the steering. compliant with ITU-T G. VC-4-xv (X≤8) Supported Supported MartinioE label supported Supported Supports 4096 VLAN tags.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s) Supported. and exchange of VLAN tags.5 Gbit/s) VC-3. The N2EM40 and N2EGR2 boards support traffic classification based on port. port +VLAN ID.17. IEEE 802. VC-4.7041.1q/p. or MPLS_label. wrapping. port+VLAN ID. 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 (2. VC-3-2v. compliant with ITU-T G. LCAS CAR Flow control QoS traffic classification Supported.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features Basic Functions The EMR0 and EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the RPR features defined by IEEE 802.

On an RPR ring. Table 5-6 RPR service class Class A Subcla ss A0 A1 B B_CIR B_EIR C C Bandwidth Pre-allocated. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses. irreclaimable Pre-allocated. 5-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . B and C.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Function Boards N1EMR0 N2EMR0 Supported N2EGR2 Supported Intra-board port aggregation Weighted fairness algorithm Topology autodiscovery Maximum number of nodes Service class Not supported Supported Supported 255 Five classes: A0. which are A. Hence. reclaimable Pre-allocated. which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting existing services. Table 5-6 lists the differences among these classes. not preallocated Preemptible. the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR. A1. B_CIR. not preallocated Jitter Low Low Medi um High High Fairness Algorithm Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Relevant Relevant Applicatio n Real-time services Real-time services Near realtime services Near realtime services Best effort transmission Topology Auto-Discovery The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly discover the topologies and their changes. you can use the LCAS function. reclaimable Preemptible. B_EIR and C Service Class The user data has three classes. for all nodes in a ring network. Class A is further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR.

3 and 4 to Node 1.25 Gbit/s Node 2 Dual-ring 2. that is. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4. and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. the weights of Nodes 2.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features Spatial Reuse On an RPR. 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1.25 Gbit/s.2 Gbit/s. the fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s. 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer ring. the bandwidth utilization is improved. assume the bandwidth that is available for lower-class services to preempt is 1.25 Gbit/s Fairness Algorithm The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. these two weights decide at what bandwidth the node transmits lowerclass services on the inner ring and the outer ring. the bandwidth of a single ring is 1. 3 and 4 to Node 1. In this case. the weights of Nodes 2. Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse Node 1 Traffic 1 1. In this case.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Bandwidth of single ring is 1. In the case of preemptible bandwidth. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-17 . 600 Mbit/s. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. In this way. Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1. the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2. 3 and 2 respectively. In this case. the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse for ring bandwidth.25Gbit/s Node 3 Traffic 2 1. and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths respectively for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2. Figure 5-11 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights. As shown in Figure 5-9. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates. As shown in Figure 5-10.

5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1 Node Node2 Node3 Node4 Node 1 Weight 1 1 1 3 2 Node 2 Node 3 1 Dual-ring 2. and sends the packet onto the RPR. EVPL Service The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN. Figure 5-13 illustrates the EVPL service convergence. in which traffic classification is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1. and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4.2.2 Application The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services. Figure 5-12 illustrates the accessing. forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Traffic 1 2 3 Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 600 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s 5. 5-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . which then strips the packet.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 6 Node 5 Traffic 1 2 3 Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different Node Node2 Node3 Node4 Node 1 Weight 1 3 2 3 2 Node 2 1 Node 3 Dual-ring 2. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet.

and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 2 Node 4 FE/GE FE/GE LSP Action Tunnel VC Destination Insertion 100 100 Node 4 Node 3 Action Tunnel VC Stripping 100 100 Action Forwarding Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Traffic Port1+VLAN 2 Port1+VLAN 3 Port1+VLAN 4 Tunnel 200 300 400 VC 200 300 400 Destination Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 VLAN 4 GE Node 1 FE VLAN 2 Node 2 Node 4 FE VLAN 4 Dual-ring 2. B2 or C1. the packets are forwarded through Port 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 3 FE VLAN 3 EVPLAN Service The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN. If the destination address is B1. The EVPLAN service is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. By address self-learning. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-19 . the packets are forwarded through Port 1. the VB of each node determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. If the destination address is A2. Port rpr1 is where the packets are accessed onto the RPR.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing. if the destination MAC address of the packets is A1. the packets are forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1. forwarding and stripping Node 1 Dual-ring 2. At Node 1. The VB supports the self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes. Figure 5-14 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Node 2 forwards packets in the same way.

5 Gbit/s RPR Node 2 B2 Port 2 MAC forwarding table of node 2 Node 3 MAC A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 Port rpr1 rpr1 port 1 port 2 rpr1 stack VLAN 100 100 none none 100 Node 4 MAC A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 Port port 1 port 2 rpr1 rpr1 rpr1 stack VLAN none none 100 100 100 B1 Port 1 Port 1 C1 5. Figure 5-15 illustrates the wrapping protection. and SNCTP Wrapping When a failure is detected on the ring. so that the protection is realized. the wrapping function performs an automatic loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3. The advantages of this protection scheme are a fast protection speed and a small loss of data. Nodes 2 and 3 perform an automatic loopback to connect the inner ring and the outer ring.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service A1 A2 MAC forwarding table of node 1 Port 2 Port 1 Node 1 Dual-ring A2 2. steering and wrapping+steering LCAS RSTP Optical transmission layer protections. and at last reaches Node 1. 5-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn. thus to connect the inner ring and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth. SNCMP. The traffic is sent from Node 4. such as MSP.2.3 Protection The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes. SNCP. The protection schemes of the RPR services include: l l l l Wrapping.

Figure 5-16 illustrates the steering protection. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3. the protection switching speed is low. On the basis of this new topology. and some data is discarded before a new route is generated. Instead.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Traffic flow Node 1 Node 6 Node 5 Steering In the steering protection. all through the outer ring.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 1 Traffic flow after switching Node 6 Node 5 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-21 . all through the inner ring. the source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. Figure 5-16 Steering protection Node 2 Fiber cut X Node 3 Node 4 Traffic flow before switching Dual-ring 2. and at last reaches Node 1. The disadvantage is that. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than 16. passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn. the traffic is sent from Node 4. the traffic is sent from Node 4. switching is not performed at the failure point. the topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology. The advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features Figure 5-15 Wrapping protection Node 2 Fiber cut X Node 3 Dual-ring 2. and at last reaches Node 1. Before a failure occurs on the ring. the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. when the network scale is large.

Figure 5-17 illustrates the wrapping+steering protection. and at last reaches Node 1. so Nodes 2 and 3 are automatically loopbacked. when a failure is detected on the ring. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology. all through the inner ring. As a result. Figure 5-17 Wrapping+steering protection Node 2 Fiber cut Traffic flow X Node 3 Dual-ring 2. a steering switching is performed. the traffic is sent from Node 4.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 1 Traffic flow after switching Node 6 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 5-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . all through the outer ring. Before a failure occurs on the ring. passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn. the ring first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and lessen the packet loss. the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination through the best route and the waste of bandwidth is lessened. and at last reaches Node 1. the traffic passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 1 Node 6 Node 5 Node 2 Fiber cut X Dual-ring 2. a wrapping switching is first performed. After the topology autodiscovery protocol discovers a new topology.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Wrapping+Steering In the wrapping+steering protection.

or SNCTP scheme is used.1 Functions OThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards. RSTP The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). application and protection. 5. L-1. S-1.1. the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM services.2 Application The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services. IDL4. When the RSTP is started. 5.2 and Ve-4. which are ADL4.3 Protection The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers. ADQ1.1.2 and Ve-1. SNCP. L-4. which are ADL4.2 5-23 1 x STM-4 S-4. Table 5-7 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards. SNCP.3.3. For details about the LCAS. MSP. and protects the bandwidth. An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an N1ADQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. ADQ1. and IDQ1.1.3.1 Functions OThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards.2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary . it logically modifies the network topology to avoid a broadcast storm. refer to section 5. 5.3.1. When working with the N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board.3 Protection. The RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. SNCMP and SNCTP At the optical transmission layer.1. and IDQ1.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features LCAS The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically. L-1. Table 5-7 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1 Function Boards ADL4 Front panel interface Optical interface specification Issue 01 (2007-06-15) ADQ1 4 x STM-1 Ie-1.3 ATM Features This section describes the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions. 5. IDL4. SNCMP. 5. Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP. L-4.

2 LC N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 Ie-1.2 Gbit/s VC-3. VC-4. ATM forum TM 4. L-4. S-1.630) OAM function (ITUT I.610) LC SFP Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3. Table 5-8 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1 Function Boards N1IDL4 Front panel interface Optical interface specification Connector type 1 x STM-4 S-4. nrt-VBR and UBR 2048 IETF RFC2514.1.1. L-4. or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4 1.1.1. When working with the E1 processing board. CC (Continuity Check) An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. or VC-4-xv (x≤4) CBR.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Function Boards ADL4 ADQ1 Connector type Optical module type E3 ATM interface IMA Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection (ITU-T I. Table 5-8 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.2 and Ve-4.2 5-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . RDI. L-1. rt-VBR.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1. N1PL3. VC-Ring AIS. the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services. Not supported 8 VC-4. VP-Ring. 1:1.2 and Ve-1. or N1PL3A board. LB (Loopback). L-1.

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-25 .2 Application The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services. VC-4. ATM forum TM 4. CC (continuity check) Supported. nrt-VBR. VP-Ring. and UBR services.1 standards) SFP Not supported Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1 processing board N1PQ1. Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features Function Boards N1IDL4 N1IDQ1 Optical module type E3 ATM interface IMA (compliant with ATM Forum IMA 1. Each IMA group supports 1–32 E1 services. rt-VBR. nrt-VBR and UBR 2048 IETF RFC2514. or VC-4-xv (X≤4) CBR.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1.630) OAM function (ITUT I. Supported Services and Traffic Types The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CBR. 1:1. rt-VBR. Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay. N1PQM. or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4 1 Gbit/s VC-12.3.610) Board level 1+1 protection 8 VC-4. RDI. Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection (ITU-T I. VC-Ring AIS. with switching time less than 1s 5. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM port. LB (Loopback).Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to the ATM port. or N2PQ1. but does not support ABR services.

1 rt-VBR. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4 5-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . without ATM layer processing. Cdvt Clp01Pcr. as well as video services and circuit emulation services of a constant bit rate. Mbs. The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission. Clp0Scr. As shown in Figure 5-18.3 Parameter None Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr. at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing board. 1 2 Traffic Type atmNoTrafficDescriptor atmNoClpNoScr Service Type UBR UBR. Table 5-9 ATM service types and traffic types No. Clp01Scr. each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer. the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output. The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.1 Recommendations. Cdvt Clp01Pcr. Cdvt Clp01Pcr. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency. Mbs Clp01Pcr.0. Clp0Scr. Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr.1 rt-VBR. Cdvt Clp01Pcr.3 CBR. Mbs. In this case. Mbs Clp01Pcr. At the central node. Clp0Scr. ATM Forum TM 4. only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed.2 nrt-VBR. On intermediate NEs. l l l In terms of the supported services and traffic types. Clp01Scr. Clp01Scr. Mbs Clp01Pcr.1 nrt-VBR. See Table 5-9.5 Data Features l OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description The CBR services apply to voice services. the OptiX OSN 3500 meets IETF RFC2514. the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. Cdvt Clp01Pcr.1 CBR 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr atmClpTaggingNoScr atmNoClpScr atmClpNoTaggingScr atmClpTaggingScr atmClpTransparentNoScr atmClpTransparentScr atmNoClpTaggingNoScr atmNoClpNoScrCdvt CBR CBR nrt-VBR. Mbs. Clp0Scr. Cdvt Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services When the bandwidth is not shared.2 UBR CBR 12 13 14 atmNoClpScrCdvt atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR. Cdvt Clp01Pcr. and ATM Forum UNI 3.2 rt-VBR.1 UBR. Mbs. Cdvt Clp01Pcr. Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr.

Only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. it is sent onto the line by the cross-connect board. or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features bandwidth. NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Figure 5-18 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services DSLAM 34M ATM Traffic Service Convergence NE 1 2. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3. the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s. After the three services reach the central station NE4. VC-4. Then the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. and then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time. Then after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv. As shown in Figure 5-19. they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-27 .5 Gbit/s SDH Ring NE 2 NE 4 Router 155M ATM Traffic 622M ATM Traffic DSLAM NE 3 34M ATM Traffic DSLAM Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for ATM services.

The IMA technology only provides a path. NE 1 34M ATM Traffic 155M ATM Traffic VC4-Xv VP/ VC-Ring NE 4 Route r DSLAM NE 2 622M ATM Traffic NE 3 DSLAM 34M ATM Traffic Application of IMA Services The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. Figure 5-20 illustrates the IMA service networking. The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the E1 rate or other rates. and then sent to VP/VC-Ring after converged with local service. and does not process service types and ATM cells. At the far end.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 5-19 VP-Ring/VC-Ring DSLAM The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to the NE2. the lower rate links are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow. 5-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently transmitted.

SNCMP. for example. SNCMP. 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection.630. SNCTP Non-revertive protection Group connection protection 5-29 . Table 5-10 Classification of ATM protection Classification Scheme Bridging function Switching direction Connection level Protection domain Revertive mode Protected object Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Protection Type 1+1 protection Unidirectional protection VPC protection Trail protection Revertive protection Single connection protection Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1:1 protection Bidirectional protection VCC protection SNCP. such as MSP. SNCP. You can select a combination of the following types as required.3. and SNCTP 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards ATM Layer Protections Compliant with ITU-T I. l l l ATM layer protections Optical transmission layer protections.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features Figure 5-20 IMA service networking RNC NE1 T2000 25km 40km NE4 NodeB 1 NE2 STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring 35km NE3 NodeB 4 30km NodeB 2 NodeB 3 5.3 Protection The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers. as listed in Table 5-10. protections at the ATM layer are classified in different ways. The following protections are available.

The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client side. In this way. the MSP. thus achieving the protection of the working ATM service (in this case. For the configuration of 1 +1 board level protection.5 Mbit/s 2125 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s 270 Mbit/s Remarks SAN service SAN service SAN service Video service 5-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . where the protection schemes include MSP. FC100 supports 40 km. the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON or 4 x DVB-ASI services. the protection switching at the ATM layer is not performed). and FC200 supports 20 km.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Optical Transmission Layer Protections The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer. FC100 supports 3000 km. FICON. when network impairment occurs.7041. Using all the four ports.4 SAN Features The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board. to access and transparently transmit FC. SNCMP. The board also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services. 8.5 Gbit/s. 1+1 Board Level Protection for IMA Boards The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. or 16). All port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type. with the total bandwidth being not more than 2. You can set the holdoff time for the ATM protection switching. which means that one FC200 service or two FC100 services are supported. The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side. l l l l l Table 5-11 lists the service types and bit rates provided by the N1MST4 board. 5. The N1MST4 board is described in detail as follows: l The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. ESCON and DVB-ASI services. and SNCTP. SNCP. the IDQ1 and IDL4 boards must be inserted in paired slots. the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and FC200) services. All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format. SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical transmission layer performs the switching first. Using all the four ports. and FC200 supports 1500 km. Table 5-11 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4 Service Type FC100/FICON FC200 ESCON DVB-ASI Bit Rate 1062. N1MST4. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4. which is compliant with ITU-T G. SNCP .

Working with the N1DX1 board. N1DXA Cross-connects 63 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side. and crossconnects 48 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side. EIA530-A. V. None. RS449. N x 64 bit/s interface: RS232. l l Table 5-12 lists the functions and features of the DDN boards.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services.5. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-31 . Table 5-12 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA Board Feature Processing capability N1DX1 (N1DM12) Processes 8 x 64 kbit/s and eight framed E1 services. The N1DXA board cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.5 DDN Features This section describes the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions and application.2 Application When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500. V. EIA530. 5. and the DB44 connector is used for framed E1 signals. The DB28 connector is used for N x 64 bit/s signals. l The N1DX1 board processes 8 x 64 kbit/s services and eight framed E1 services and realizes the service convergence.35.21. 48 x E1. The N1DX1 also cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Data Features 5.24 and X. 5.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4. the N1DM12 board accesses framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/ s services. 5.5. the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services. Bandwidth at SDH side Interface specifications 63 x E1. None. Interface impedance Connector type None.5. The connectors are on the DM12 board.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services. 75 ohms or 120 ohms.

5-32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . RS449. government agencies. The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used on the following occasions.21 and framed E1 can be accessed to a transmission network. N1DXA Not supported. Not supported.24. V. V. and banking and security service halls. Supports inloop and outloop for all ports.5. the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services. l l l l Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Access and convergence of multipoint routers The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized and medium-sized enterprises. 5. Supported. A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance. EIA530-A.2 Application When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500. X. so various services such as RS232. Supports inloop and outloop for all ports. A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance. EIA530.5 Data Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board Feature Protection Loopback PRBS self-test Alarm and performance N1DX1 (N1DM12) Supports 1:N TPS protection with the switching time being less than 50 ms.35.

6.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 DCN Features 6 About This Chapter The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several DCN schemes. 6. 6. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-1 . DCN Features 6.2 HWECC The HWECC protocol is a private protocol defined by Huawei.3 IP Over DCC The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol.4 OSI Over DCC The equipment supports the OSI Over DCC protocol.1 Overview The SDH element management system (EMS) sets up communication with SDH NEs through a data communication network (DCN). to manage and maintain these SDH NEs.

the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a building. In a DCN. In practical networking. In a DCN. 6.6 DCN Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 6. to manage and maintain these SDH NEs. Therefore. or even in different cities.1. the OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult. This section describes the internal DCN composed of SDH NEs.2 SDH DCN Solutions The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three communication protocols for the DCN networking. the EMS and NEs are both regarded as network nodes. For a DCN.1 Overview The SDH element management system (EMS) sets up communication with SDH NEs through a data communication network (DCN). the connection between the EMS and NEs usually requires an external DCN that is composed of equipment such as Lanswitch and routers. the D bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN management. A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost.1 Background of SDH DCN With the development of network scale. the SDH provides the following bandwidth. On the other hand. 6-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . See Figure 6-1.1 Background of SDH DCN With the development of network scale. Figure 6-1 DCN networking HuaWei T2000 IP/OSI DCN External DCN HWECC or IP/OSI over DCC Interior DCN 6.1.1. in different buildings. the DCN among NEs is referred to as an internal DCN. A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost. 6. which can be connected through Ethernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs). the OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult. The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels so that the network construction cost is greatly lowered.

The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and application. Figure 6-2 Positions of D bytes in SDH overheads A1 B1 D1 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 AU PTR B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 * * RSOH MSOH 6. By using the D1–D12 bytes in SDH section overheads. and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit the OAM information. As it is private.2 SDH DCN Solutions The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three communication protocols for the DCN networking. By using the D4–D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH). Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-3 . l l Figure 6-2 shows the positions of D bytes in SDH overheads. The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the management issue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description l 6 DCN Features By using the D1–D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH). The three communication protocols are as follows. Huawei provides the transparent transmission function for DCC bytes.1. the HWECC protocol does not meet the management requirements for hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. l l l HWECC TCP/IP (IP over DCC) OSI (OSI over DCC) The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN networking of OptiX equipment. NOTE When OptiX equipment is interconnected with other vendors' equipment that does not support the TCP/IP and OSI standard communication protocols. the SDH provides a 768 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN. the SDH provides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN. the SDH provides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN. These two protocols can also be used in a network that is composed of only Huawei equipment.

Default protocol type D1-D3 HWECC Default mode Mode 1 D4-D12 IP D1-D3 HWECC D4-D12 IP N3GSCC Supports both the D1–D3 and D4–D12 channel types. 6. NOTE l In the OptiX OSN 3500.2 HWECC The HWECC protocol is a private protocol defined by Huawei. 6-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . Supports 6 D4–D12 channels. l l The protocol provides a flexible networking environment.2.2. The protocol provides transparent transmission for the OAM information from other vendors’ equipment.2 Application The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.1 Features The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment. the user is able to fulfill a centralized management of equipment. Supports 40 D4–D12 channels.1 Features The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment. 6. but can transparently transmit such OAM information. 6.2. each slot supports a maximum of eight ECC channels. Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500 DCC Allocation Channel type Operation mode Mode 1 Mode 2 N1GSCC Supports both the D1–D3 and D4–D12 channel types. Using the existing DCC resources. the HWECC protocol is not able to identify the OAM information from other vendors’ equipment. NEs can be connected through optical interfaces or Ethernet interfaces for embedded control channel (ECC) communication. Supports 160 D1–D3 channels.6 DCN Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 6-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Mode 3 Supports 22 D1–D3 channels. - 6. Supports 10 D1–D3 channels. Supports 40 D1–D3 channels. In hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. Supports 10 D4–D12 channels. The HWECC protocol has the following features. Supports 40 D1–D3 channels.

the T2000 tests. and ensure a reasonable use of network resources.2. the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4–D12 bytes of the OptiX OSN equipment. See Figure 6-4. lower the maintenance cost. In some special cases.2 Application The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking. a gateway NE is required for the communication with the T2000. The T2000 system helps improve the network service quality. Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC) D1-D3 Third party equipment Transparent transmission D1-D3 Third party equipment Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-5 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 DCN Features 6. to realize the transmission of the OAM information. See Figure 6-3. Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC PC HUB1 GNE1 N NE6 E6 NE5 HUB2 NE7 NE12 NE2 NE8 NE9 NE11 NE10 NE3 Network cable Fiber NE4 Subnet1 Subnet2 OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment. manages and maintains the entire network. extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces is also available among NEs. Connected to the gateway NE through the Qx interface. A non-gateway NE is connected to the gateway NE through ECC. OAM Information Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment Only When OAM information is transmitted only among OptiX OSN equipment.

In this case.2 Application The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.3. additional overheads or server trails are not required for the transmission of the OAM information of other vendors’ equipment. The protocol provides flexible networking modes. 6. the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4-D12 bytes of the equipment. the network management is simplified. The Layer 3 functions of protocol stacks are adopted. Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC) Third party equipment Third party equipment Transparent transmission D1-D3 D1-D3 6.1 Features Using the IP over DCC protocol. l The TCP/IP protocol realizes the compatibility with the equipment from other vendors.6 DCN Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment. See Figure 6-5.3 IP Over DCC The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol. the OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information. The IP over DCC protocol has the following features. the OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information.3. 6. In this case. l l l 6.1 Features Using the IP over DCC protocol. 6. Several application layer protocols are supported. 6-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .3.3.2 Application The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (IP) Third party equipment IP over DCC Third party equipment OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment. the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third-party equipment. by using the IP over DCC protocol.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 DCN Features OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment. Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (IP) Third party equipment Third party equipment IP over DCC Third party equipment Third party equipment 6. the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment. See Figure 6-7.4 OSI Over DCC The equipment supports the OSI Over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-6. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-7 . by using the IP over DCC protocol.

4.1 Features The OSI over DCC protocol is for hybrid networking between OptiX OSN equipment and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC. each subnet composed of Huawei equipment must have at least one gateway NE. The user does not need to set up additional DCN channels. As shown in Figure 6-8. the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third-party equipment. the OSI over DCC protocol enables transparent transmission of OAM information at the network layer. The OSI over DCC protocol has the following features: l In a transmission network composed of equipment from different vendors.2 Application The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking. Huawei equipment is at the network edges. The OAM information between the T2000 and the OptiX OSN equipment needs to be forwarded by equipment from other vendors. by using the OSI over DCC protocol. l 6. Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (OSI) OSI protocol stack Third party equipment OSI protocol stack Third party equipment OSI over DCC OSI protocol stack 6-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . In this case.6 DCN Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 6.4. 6.1 Features The OSI over DCC protocol is for hybrid networking between OptiX OSN equipment and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC. The existing DCC resources realize the centralized management of equipment from different vendors. 6.4. OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment. and thus provides a more flexible networking.4.2 Application The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking. and equipment from other vendors is in the backbone network.

the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment. A more common hybrid networking is that equipment from different vendors coexists at both the core layer and the peripheral layer. Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (OSI) Third party equipment Third party equipment OSI protocol stack OSI protocol stack OSI over DCC Third party equipment OSI protocol stack Third party equipment Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-9 . The OAM information between the network management system and the equipment of other vendors needs to be forwarded by the Huawei equipment. by using the OSI over DCC protocol. NOTE In actual application. As shown in Figure 6-9. the Huawei equipment is in the backbone network. and equipment from other vendors is at the network edges. a network cannot always be divided in such a clear manner.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 DCN Features OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment.

.

When there are enough resources in the network. gold services have greater bandwidth utilization. such as the abrupt services in holidays. temporary services.2 End-to-End Service Configuration The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement. 7. 7. Compared with diamond services. 7. 7. are configured as copper services.8 Copper Services The copper services are seldom used. 7. security and aviation. 7. 7.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 ASON Features 7 About This Chapter ASON Features The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. VIP private line.5 Diamond Services Diamond services have the best protection ability. such as banking. which is very convenient. diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. 7. The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN series products. the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN series products support the ASON features.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links and TE links. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services. Generally.6 Gold Services Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services.4 SLA The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.7 Silver Services The service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. 7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network security. With this software.9 Iron Services Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-1 .

7. during holidays. Of course.14 Reverting Services to Original Routes After many changes in an ASON network.16 Equilibrium of Network Traffic The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.12 Service Optimization After the topology changes several times. the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. Tunnels are also called as ASON server trails.15 Preset Restoring Trail Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. 7.18 ASON Trail Group The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.13 Service Migration OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services. The service conversion is in-service conversion. the service route can be restricted during the service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP. temporary services are configured as iron services. 7-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . service routes may differ from the original routes.11 Service Association The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points into the ASON network.7 ASON Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description The iron services are also seldom used. You can revert all service to the original routes. switching the optimized service to the new LSP. 7. the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus requires service optimization. To this end. the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources. 7.17 Shared Risk Link Group In the ASON network. Generally. 7. when service volume soars. 7. For example. 7. and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. 7.10 Tunnels Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. and between ASON services and traditional services. 7. the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing. which would not interrupt the services. 7.19 Protocol Encryption You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network.

ASON NEs automatically discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management system for real-time display. The following figure shows the details.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 ASON Features 7.1. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-3 .1. 7. When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol. 7. which is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets. See Figure 7-2. See Figure 7-1. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table. 7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links and TE links. As a result.1. each ASON NE uses the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control links to the entire network.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol. each NE obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide control topology. Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links ASON domain When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete.

Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network through OSPF-TE. and then reports the change to T2000. the NM updates the resource topology displayed on the NM in real time. After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP. the network-wide resource topology. including the deletion and addition of links. As shown in Figure 7-3. that is. 7-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . if one TE link is cut. which performs a real-time refresh. ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time. and the change in the link parameters. the TE link verification can be started.1.7 ASON Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 7-2 Management of control topology R1 R4 R2 R3 : ASON NE : User equipment 7.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links.

Choose the server level. Choose the source node. The service is created as follows: l l l l l Choose the bandwidth granularity. consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in Figure 7-4. D.2 End-to-End Service Configuration The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration. Although there is more than one route from A to I. For example. bandwidth requirement.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 ASON Features Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery R1 R4 R2 R3 : ASON NE : User equipment 7. which is very convenient. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the network. The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. sink node. E and I. and protection level. explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing. To configure an ASON service. excluded node. it fully utilizes the routing and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services. Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks. Create the service. you only need to specify its source node. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-5 . The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection at nodes A. Choose the sink node. You can also set explicit node.

7-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .7 ASON Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration R1 E D A B C H G I F R4 R2 R3 : ASON NE : User equipment 7. the mesh networking does not need to reserve 50% bandwidth.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network security. when the C-G link fails. In addition. Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode. this networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network security. to restore the service. As shown in Figure 7-5. As a main networking mode of ASON. Thus. it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidth demand. the network calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service. mesh features high flexibility and scalability.

The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection.4 SLA The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients. Table 7-1 Service level Service Diamond service Gold service Silver service Copper service Iron service Protection and Restoration Scheme Protection and restoration Implementation Means SNCP and rerouting Switching and Rerouting Time Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s Protection and restoration MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s Restoration No protection No restoration Preemptable MSP Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s - Table 7-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-7 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 ASON Features Figure 7-5 Trail restoration R1 E D A B C H G I F R4 R2 R3 : ASON NE : User equipment 7. as listed in Table 7-1.

VIP private line. such as banking. diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services. It is also called a 1+1 service.7 ASON Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services Service Level Working Resource of TE Link Not used Not used Protection Resource of TE Link Not used Used when the resource is not enough Not used Not used Non-Protection Resource of TE Link Used Used with the priority Diamon d service Service creation Service rerouting Service optimization Not used Used with the priority Used with the priority Used with the priority Not used Not used Used Used when the resource is not enough Used when the resource is not enough Used when the resource is not enough Used Used with the priority Gold service Service creation Service rerouting Service optimization Used when the resource is not enough Not used Silver service Service creation Service rerouting Service optimization Not used Used when the resource is not enough Not used Not used Not used Used with the priority Not used Not used Not used Not used Used Used Used Used when the resource is not enough Copper service Service creation Service optimization Iron service Service creation 7. there are two different LSPs available between 7-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . security and aviation.5 Diamond Services Diamond services have the best protection ability. For a diamond service. When there are enough resources in the network. A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node.

l Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-9 . The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered. Table 7-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. otherwise. If the resources are not sufficient. Table 7-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service. from the protection LSP.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 ASON Features the source node and the sink node. the sink node receives the service from the working LSP. Figure 7-6 Diamond Services Working LSP R1 E D A B C H G F R4 I R2 R3 Protection LSP : ASON NE : User equipment There are three types of diamond services. One is the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP. l l l Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails. Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail. Table 7-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service. If the working LSP is normal. Figure 7-6 shows a diamond service. two LSPs are always available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. one LSP can still be reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service survivability. Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node l If the resources are sufficient.

When the active LSP fails. B2_SD. rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services. Rerouting is not triggered. services are not switched. R_LOF. B2_EXC. AU_AIS Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node l When the standby LSP fails. l l 7-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . When both the active and the standby LSPs fail. MS_AIS. Rerouting is not triggered.7 ASON Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Attribute Rerouting Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service l l l Supports rerouting lockout Supports rerouting priority Supports three rerouting policies: – – – No rerouting constraint Use existing trails whenever possible Do not use existing trails whenever possible l l l l Supports setting the revertive mode Supports setting the trigger condition Supports setting the WTR time Supports setting the crankback times Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services Supports migration between diamond services and silver services Supports migration between diamond services and copper services Revertive l l Service migration l l l Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting Supports manual switching Supports service optimization Does not support service association Does not support diamond ASON server trails R_LOS. services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. MS_RDI.

rerouting is not triggered. B2_EXC. MS_AIS. When the standby LSP fails. B2_SD.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 ASON Features Attribute Rerouting Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service l l l Supports rerouting lockout Supports rerouting priority Supports three rerouting policies: – – – No rerouting constraint Use existing trails whenever possible Do not use existing trails whenever possible Revertive l Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services Supports migration between diamond services and silver services Supports migration between diamond services and copper services l Service migration l l l Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting Supports manual switching Supports service optimization Does not support service association Does not support diamond ASON server trails R_LOS. Rerouting is not triggered. Rerouting is not triggered. services are not switched. Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services Supports migration between diamond services and silver services Supports migration between diamond services and copper services l l Service migration l l l Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-11 . services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. AU_AIS Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node l When the active LSP fails. MS_RDI. R_LOF. When both the active and the standby LSPs fail.

the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or nonprotection resource of TE links. A gold service needs only one LSP. a gold service can be configured from A to I. 7-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . If the multiplex section protection fails.7 ASON Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Attribute Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Supports manual switching Supports service optimization Does not support service association Does not support diamond ASON server trails 7. Figure 7-7 Gold services R1 E D MSP R4 MSP I F C MSP A B R2 H G R3 : ASON NE : User equipment Table 7-6 lists the attributes of gold services. Compared with diamond services. gold services have greater bandwidth utilization. the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first.6 Gold Services Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut. As shown in Figure 7-7.

Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services. B2_SD. MS_AIS. l l Protection and restoration Rerouting When a fiber is cut for the first time. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 ASON Features Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services Attribute Requirements for creation Multiplex section protection Gold Service Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. Do not use existing trails whenever possible. MS_RDI. l Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.7 Silver Services The service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-13 . Revertive l l Preset restoring trail Service migration Service switching Service optimization ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting Supports setting the preset restoring trail Supports migration between permanent connections and gold services. Supports manual switching Supports service optimization Supports gold ASON server trails R_LOS. When MS switching fails. Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually. MS switching is performed to protect services. R_LOF. No rerouting constraint l l l l Supports setting the revertive mode Supports setting the priority Supports setting the WTR time Supports setting the crankback times Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically. B2_EXC. rerouting is then triggered to restore services. l l Supports rerouting lockout Supports three rerouting policies: – – – Use existing trails whenever possible. AU_AIS 7.

services are protected. Hence.7 ASON Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Silver services are also called rerouting services. Figure 7-8 A silver service R1 E D A B C H G I F R4 R2 R3 : ASON NE : User equipment Table 7-7 lists the attributes of silver services. periodical rerouting is performed until the rerouting succeeds. If the fiber between B and G is cut. Upon an LSP failure. If there are not enough resources. service may be interrupted. rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services. As shown in Figure 7-8. the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Silver Services Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. When the original LSP fails. A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. 7-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .

it cannot be optimized before reverting to its original route. If a revertive silver service reroutes. services do not reroute and are interrupted.8 Copper Services The copper services are seldom used. Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually. B2_EXC. B2_SD. Generally. Copper services are also called non-protection services. R_LOF. temporary services. MS_RDI. l l Service optimization l l Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting Supports service association Supports silver ASON server trails R_LOS. Table 7-8 lists the attributes of copper services. are configured as copper services. AU_AIS 7. such as the abrupt services in holidays. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-15 . If an LSP fails.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 ASON Features Attribute Rerouting Silver Services l l l Supports rerouting lockout Supports rerouting priority Supports three rerouting policies: – – – No rerouting constraint Use existing trails whenever possible Do not use existing trails whenever possible l l l Supports setting the crankback times Supports setting the revertive mode Supports setting the WTR time Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically. Revertive l l Preset restoring trail Service migration Supports setting the preset restoring trail l Supports migration between permanent connections and silver services Supports migration between diamond services and silver services Supports migration between silver services and copper services Supports service optimization. MS_AIS.

When the MS recovers. the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.9 Iron Services The iron services are also seldom used. during holidays. temporary services are configured as iron services. iron services may be preempted and interrupted. Iron services apply non-protection links or MS protection links to create LSPs. An iron service is also called a preemptable service. services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered. the following resources can be used: l l l Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP Service restoration Service migration Service optimization 7-16 Does not support rerouting Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent connections Supports service optimization. preemption and recovery of iron services are reported to the T2000. Generally. During MS switching. To create iron services. when service volume soars. Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . When an LSP fails. Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services Attribute Requirements for creation Multiplex section protection Iron Service Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. Interruption. For example. Table 7-9 lists the attributes of iron service. iron services are recovered. Does not support rerouting l Supports migration between permanent connections and copper services Supports migration between diamond services and copper services Supports migration between silver services and copper services l l Service optimization Service association ASON server trail Supports service optimization Supports service association Supports ASON server trails 7.7 ASON Features OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Service migration Silver Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.

After creating tunnels. you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the new ports. first create a VC-4 tunnel.10 Tunnels Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. silver or copper. During service creation. silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. Figure 7-9 Tunnel VC4 tunnel VC12 service R4 R1 R3 R2 ASON domain : ASON NE : User equipment The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels. When lower order services are to be created. As shown in Figure 7-10. the ASON automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards. Then. use the management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-17 . Tunnels are also called as ASON server trails. See Figure 7-9. there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a gold ASON server trail. however. The protection level for the tunnel can be gold.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 ASON Features 7.

7 ASON Features

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Figure 7-10 Lower cross-connnection

VC12 NE1

ASON server trail VC4 NE2

VC12

Cross-connection VC12 Tributary unit Line unit

Table 7-10 lists the attributes of tunnels. Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Rerouting Gold Tunnel Same as gold services Same as gold services
l

Silver Tunnel Same as silver services Same as silver services
l

Copper Tunnel Same as copper services Does not support rerouting Does not support rerouting

Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority.

Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority.

l

l

Revertive Preconfiguration of restoring route Service association Service migration Service optimization Tunnel level

Not supported Not supported

Not supported Supported

Not supported Not supported

Not supported
l l

Supported

Supported

Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections. Supports migration between silver tunnel services and copper services.

Supports service optimization. VC-4

7.11 Service Association
The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points into the ASON network.
7-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

7 ASON Features

Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from two points. As shown in Figure 7-11, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP. Figure 7-11 Service Association

R1

E D A B C H G F

R4

I
1+1 Protection

1+1 Protection

R2

R3
: ASON NE : User equipment

Table 7-11 lists the attributes of service association. Table 7-11 Attributes of service association Attribute Service optimization Rerouting Service type Service Association Supports optimization of associated services. When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.
l l l l l l

Supports the association of two silver services. Supports association of two copper services. Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service. Supports the association of two silver tunnels. Supports the association of two copper tunnels. Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.

7.12 Service Optimization
After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the
Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-19

7 ASON Features

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the service optimization. LSP optimization has the following features.
l l l l l

Only manual optimization is supported. The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service. During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed. During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations, optimization is not allowed. The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper and tunnel services.

7.13 Service Migration
OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt the services.

Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections
Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l l l l l l

Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections Migration between gold services and permanent connections Migration between silver services and permanent connections Migration between copper services and permanent connections Migration between iron services and permanent connections Migration between tunnel services and server trail.

Service Migration between ASON Trails
Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l l l

Migration between diamond services and silver services Migration between diamond services and copper services Migration between silver services and copper services

7.14 Reverting Services to Original Routes
After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes. You can revert all service to the original routes.

CAUTION
The operation reverting network-wide services to original routes interrupts the services. Be cautious to perform the operation.

7-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

7 ASON Features

Original Route
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted to the original route manually or automatically. In addition, the current route can be set to the original route after rerouting of the ASON services.

Revertive Services
The ASON services supporting the service reverting are as follows:
l l l l

Diamond services Gold services Silver services Tunnel services

Description on Service Reverting
For the detailed description of reverting, refer to the Table 7-12. Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes Attribution Prerequisites Reverting mode Non-Revertive Service The original route has no failures and has free timeslots. Manual Revertive Service The original route has no failures. The services are automatically reverted after 10 minutes. The waitto-revert time can be set. Reverting services to original routes. Reverting services to original timeslots. Supported

Batch reverting Timeslots

Supported Reverting services to original routes. Does not revert services to original timeslots. Supported

Modifying original route

7.15 Preset Restoring Trail
Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing. The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for an ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail.

7.16 Equilibrium of Network Traffic
The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-21

7 ASON Features

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

The ASON calculates a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many services between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route. The traffic equilibrium function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 7-12, there are many silver services between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe and reliable, the ASON allocates them to different routes averagely as possible such as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I. Figure 7-12 Traffic equilibrium

R1

E D A B C H G I F

R4

R2

R3
: ASON NE : User equipment

7.17 Shared Risk Link Group
In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable. The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk. Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.

7.18 ASON Trail Group
The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.

LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 7-13, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary.
7-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

7 ASON Features

Figure 7-13 LCAS (different path)
Path 1

VCTRUNK1 Router A
NE1 NE2

Router B

Path 2

If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. As shown in Figure 7-14, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected. Figure 7-14 LCAS (same path)

VCTRUNK1

NE1

NE2

Router A

Router B

ASON Trail Group
An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible. Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.

7.19 Protocol Encryption
You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network. An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network, counterfeit a node of this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets transmitted by nodes in the network and repeat the attack. To prevent these network insecurities, the ASON provides the function to encrypt protocols. In an ASON domain, the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are encrypted for authentication. The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication for interconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces). The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5 authentication. The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent nodes are the same.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-23

SNCP protection and DNI protection.2 Network Level Protection The network level protection includes MSP protection. 8. 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1 protection for power supplies. 8.1 Equipment Level Protection The equipment level protection includes TPS protection. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-1 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection 8 About This Chapter Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 supports equipment level protection and network level protection.

1.4 1+1 Protection for the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Boards The N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS and 1+1 PPS protection schemes. Table 8-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board level 1+1 protection.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.1. 8.1. and so on.1. the equipment can run in a secure manner.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit. 8.1.1. the equipment can run in the safe manner.8 Intelligent Fans The intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the ambient temperature of the equipment. 8. Table 8-2 lists TPS protection parameters.1.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3. 8. 8.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards This section describes the TPS protection supported by the equipment in the terms of service type and protection schemes. 8.8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8. 8-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . 8. 8.1 Equipment Level Protection The equipment level protection includes TPS protection.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards This section describes the TPS protection supported by the equipment in the terms of service type and protection schemes. This section also lists the parameters for the TPS protection. 8.1. With this protection.1. 8. the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1 protection for power supplies. This section also lists the parameters for the TPS protection.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection. 8.3 V board power supply.

N2SPQ4. N1SEP Supported Boards N1PQ1. the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the cross-connect and timing board. N2PL3.1. N1PQM. the equipment can run in the safe manner. N1PL3. N2PD3. For the OptiX OSN 3500.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards Service Type E1/T1 Protection Scheme Main subrack: one 1:N protection (N≤8) Extended subrack: one 1:N protection (N≤8) E3/T3/E4/STM-1 Main subrack: two 1:N (N≤3) protections Extended subrack: two 1:N (N≤ 3) protections Ethernet DDN Two 1:1 protections One 1:N protection (N≤8) N1PD3. Switching time Revertive mode WTR time ≤ 50 ms Revertive 300s to 720s. 8. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are both protected. A switching command is issued. Priority 1 is the highest priority. The hardware of the working board fails. Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters Parameter Priority Switching type Switching condition Description 1–X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Forced switching. N2PQ3.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units. N4EFS0 N1DX1 a: The N2PQ1 board does not support T1 services. lockout of switching Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l l l l l The clock of the working board is lost. Table 8-3 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units. The working board is under a cold reset. The working board is offline. The WTR time of 600s is recommended. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-3 . N2PQ1a N2EFS0. N1SPQ4. manual switching.

and the original working board becomes the protection board. the equipment can run in a secure manner.8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description By default. the original protection board becomes the working board. The working board is under a cold reset. slot 9 is for the working board and slot 10 is for the protection board. For the OptiX OSN 3500. The hardware of the working board fails. The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. Table 8-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit. and the original working board becomes the protection board. The 1+1 backup is used for the GSCC. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l l l l The working board is offline.1. The hardware of the working board fails. Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description By default. The working board is under a cold reset. the original protection board becomes the working board. A switching command is issued.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit. Revertive mode Non-revertive. 8. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l l l l The working board is offline. 8. A switching command is issued. When the active GSCC is working.4 1+1 Protection for the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Boards The N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS and 1+1 PPS protection schemes. After successful switching. Revertive mode Non-revertive. the standby GSCC is in the protection state. 8-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . After successful switching. the GSCC board provides the system control and communication (SCC) functions.1. Table 8-5 lists the 1+1 BPS and 1+1 PPS protection parameters of the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards. slot 18 is for the working board and slot 17 is for the protection board.

Table 8-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Configurable as required. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends. The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers or network cables.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board level 1+1 protection. The clock of the working board is lost. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l l l l The port status of the working board is Link Down.1. The hardware of the working board fails. l l CAUTION The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the protection group. 8. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-5 . The working mode should not be modified before the protection group is deleted. the protection group becomes abnormal. the following conditions must be met. l The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working mode as the protection group. Revertive mode Switching time Non-revertive ≤ 350 ms When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS protection switching. Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Description Configurable as required. Otherwise. A switching command is issued.

Table 8-7 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board. A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection. the other power supply takes over to ensure normal operation of the equipment. Revertive mode Switching time Non-revertive ≤ 50 ms 8. the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types: One is single fed and single receiving. and one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Configurable as required. the OptiX OSN 3500 can access two –48 V DC power supplies.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. The hardware of the board fails. These two power supplies back up each other. In the OptiX OSN 3500. 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l l The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued. The power supply of the board fails. When either of them fails. that is. Using the two N1PIU boards.1. The clock of the board fails.8 Intelligent Fans The intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the ambient temperature of the equipment. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection. 8.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Parameter Switching condition Description Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l l l l A manual switching command is issued.1. 8-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .1. Revertive mode Switching time Non-revertive ≤ 50 ms 8. and the other is dual fed and selective receiving.

Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning. 8.2.1. 8. until the software is successfully and completely loaded. when the value of such a register is changed due to unstable voltages. When one of the fan modules becomes faulty. After software loading is interrupted. the backup power supply immediately takes over to ensure the normal operation of the board. With this protection. and so on. SNCP protection and DNI protection. When the board has an undervoltage. Instead. the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. When the board detects a high temperature. When the board has an undervoltage.1 Linear MSP Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-7 . The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can affect services. an alarm is generated to remind the maintenance personnel of cleaning the fans. the other operates at its full speed.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 uses three intelligent fan units to realize the heat dissipation. 8.3 V board power supply.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection. When the power supply of a board fails. The running status of the fan is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the fan unit. Using the power backup unit on the N1AUX board. the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software re-initializes the chip. The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection. Board Temperature Detection Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example.3 V power supply of other boards. the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed. 8. the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are not successfully or completely loaded. the power system also automatically turns off the power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.9 1:N Protection for the +3. the cross-connect and timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. Power-Down Protection During Software Loading The verification function is provided for both applications and data. The power supplies of the three fan modules back up each other.3 V Board Power Supply The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3. the OptiX OSN 3500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.2 Network Level Protection The network level protection includes MSP protection. the value can be restored to normal.1. In this case.

6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme. The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. an STM-64.2. 8. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. 1+1 dualended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings. refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning Guidelines.2.3 SNCP The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used. 8. For details. 8.8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching.7 RPR Protection The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering. 8.2. protection schemes can be set accordingly. such as the MSP.2.2 MSP Ring The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.841. an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1+1 and 1:N (N≤14) protection schemes. 8.4 DNI The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring. as required in ITU-T G. 1+1 dualended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings. Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters Protection Type 1+1 singleended switching 1+1 singleended switching 8-8 Revertive Mode Nonrevertive Revertive Switching Protocol Not required Not required Switching Time ≤ 50 ms Default WTR Time - Switching Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS ≤ 50 ms 600s Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . SNCP and non-protection.2. For the rings at the channel layer. and supports a maximum of 40 linear MSPs. 8. STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels.1 Linear MSP The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching. SNCMP and SNCTP. STM-16. 8.2.2.2. 8. extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system. In the 1:N protection scheme. Table 8-8 lists the linear MSP parameters.

with the switching time less than 50 ms.2 MSP Ring The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.2. as required in ITU-T G. Table 8-9 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.841.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection Protection Type 1+1 dualended switching 1+1 dualended switching 1:N dualended switching Revertive Mode Nonrevertive Revertive Switching Protocol APS protocol APS protocol APS protocol Switching Time ≤ 50 ms Default WTR Time - Switching Condition l l l R_LOF MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD (optional) Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching ≤ 50 ms 600s l l Revertive ≤ 50 ms 600s l l 8. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-9 . For details. refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning Guidelines. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings. Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Protection Scheme STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring Maximum Number of MSP Rings Supported 2 2 11 12 Table 8-10 lists the MSP ring parameters.

8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters Protection Type Two-fiber bidirectional MSP Revertive Mode Revertive Switching Mode l Switchi ng Time ≤ 50 ms Default WTR Time 600s Switching Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS l l l l l l l Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching Forced switching ring Manual switching ring Exercise switching ring Forced switching span Manual switching span Exercise switching span l l Two-fiber unidirectiona l MSP Revertive l ≤ 50 ms 600s R_LOF MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching l l Four-fiber bidirectional MSP Revertive l ≤ 50 ms 600s l l l l l The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 has the following features. the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to eight VC-4s. In the case of the MSP. the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 without interrupting services. the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s. 8-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring. Adjustable MS Bandwidth The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.

As a result.841 requirements. See Figure 8-1. the misconnection also occurs. for subnetworks that meet the ITU-T G. With the automatic protection switching (APS) commands. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm. each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic. each node can detect in advance the possibility of misconnection. SNCMP and SNCTP. the subnetwork connection multipath protection (SNCMP). In this case. even if only one point fails in the ring. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path.2. To prevent service misconnection. two MSP rings can be set up in one optical interface. As a result. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. each node then discards these services that may be misconnected. Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section For STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces. each OptiX OSN 3500 node sets up a detailed list of connections. MS Squelching The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level. an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-11 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection Upgradeable MS Bandwidth OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting services. SNCP The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail. 8. In an MSP ring. When there is no extra traffic in the ring. and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolated from the ring. the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic.3 SNCP The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP. and the subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP). the misconnection of services occurs. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). the OptiX OSN 3500 is able to process two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. For example. traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot.

you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to an SNCP-protected trail. the following trail-level operations are supported: l l l l l l Manual switching to protection path Manual switching to working path Forced switching to protection path Forced switching to working path Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting Revertive mode setting Table 8-11 lists the SNCP parameters. Table 8-11 SNCP parameters Protection Type SNCP Revertive Mode Revertive Switchin g Time ≤ 50 ms Default WTR Time 600s Switching Conditions Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS l l l l AU_LOP TU_LOP MS_AIS AU_AIS Issue 01 (2007-06-15) 8-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary . In addition.8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail The unprotected trail NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5 NE6 NE7 NE8 Convert to an unprotected trail Convert to an SNCP-protected trail The working trail NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5 NE6 NE7 NE8 The protection trail In the trail management window of the T2000. In the opposite way. you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail.

Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection A Working Source Protection 1 Protection 2 Protection 3 Intermediate subnetworks Sink B In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 8-3. and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service priority and then the service quality. Under normal conditions. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP. The source broadcasts services to multiple paths. The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. When services are correctly received on both the working and protection paths. NE3 receives the service from the working path. the SNCMP protects services whose source and sink can both be in the line direction or in the tributary direction. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-13 . the sink selects the service from the working path. and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. While the SNCP protects services only in a lineto-line manner. two protection paths protect a working path. In this case. the service protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink. Figure 8-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protection scheme.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection Protection Type Revertive Mode Nonrevertive Switchin g Time ≤ 50 ms Default WTR Time - Switching Conditions l l l l l l l l TU_AIS HP_UNEQ HP_TIM B2_EXC B3_EXC B3_SD BIP_EXC BIP_SD SNCMP The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path) protection scheme.

8-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking NE 3 NE 4 Protection 1 NE 2 NE 1 Working Microware Radio Protection 2 Microware Radio When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty. Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure NE 3 NE 4 Protection 1 NE 2 NE 1 Working Microware Radio Protection 2 Microware Radio When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2. NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2. as shown in Figure 8-5. as shown in Figure 8-4. and between NE1 and NE4. both become faulty. NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.

and then all services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the DNI protection. which are networked by equipment from different vendors and take different protection schemes. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings. relevant higher order alarms are raised. When the working path is faulty.2. 8. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure. The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings: l l l Two SNCP rings An SNCP ring and an MSP ring Two MSP rings Figure 8-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings. lower order alarms are raised. The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entire VC-4 path.842. and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path.4 DNI The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology. The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure NE 3 NE 4 Protection 1 NE 2 NE 1 Working Microware Radio Protection 2 Microware Radio SNCTP The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. which is compliant with the ITU-T G. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-15 . all its services can be switched to the protection path. When the working path is faulty. and the switching does not occur.

SNCP and non-protection. NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty. A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. l l l l l l l A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1. NE C and NE E are both faulty. A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings. 8-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used. the inter-ring services can be protected. 8. STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. protection schemes can be set accordingly. such as the MSP.2. STM-16. interring services are not affected. Figure 8-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty. an STM-64. For the rings at the channel layer.8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings NE A SNCP Ring 1 NE C NE D NE E SNCP Ring 2 NE F NE G Selecting Point Forward Working Routing Reverse Working Routing When any of the following faults occurs. When one node is faulty. NE D and NE F are both faulty.

6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme. N1SL16. An STM-64 or STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes. Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines MSP ring 1 STM-16 MSP ring 2 STM-16 STM-16 X STM-64 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-17 . an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups. so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. N3SL16 and N1SF16 of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. Figure 8-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. N1SLD64. two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit. as shown in Figure 8-9. N2SL16. N2SL64. N1SL64. A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board is able to process multiple sets of independent K bytes.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection STM-64 STM-64 STM-16 SNCP STM-16 MSP 8. Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP STM-4/16 STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring STM-16/64 STM-4/16 STM-4/16 STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring STM-4/16 For example.2.

as shown in Figure 8-10. regardless of which path is used. Figure 8-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. and stripping (dropping the packet locally). In this case. forwarding (forwarding the packet). The outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 1 Node 5 Node 2 In the case of a fiber cut.2. 8-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . that is. an Ethernet ring greatly decreases the communication traffic among nodes. The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR. and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring.7 RPR Protection The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring. Compared with a mesh network. The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacent to the fiber cut point. Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate MSP ring 1 STM-16 MSP ring 2 STM-16 STM-16 X STM-16 8. insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring). See Figure 8-12. the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets. every node assumes that the packets added onto the ring will finally reach their destination. the west STM-16 line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group. A node can only perform three types of operations to the packets. The reason is that a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet.8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description The OptiX OSN 3500 also supports the line units of the same rate to form a shared protection in two directions.

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-19 . During the protection switching.2. See Figure 8-13. 8. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths. the steering function is then performed. After the new topology and the new service trail are created. the wrapping function is usually performed first.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring. and can be applied on any physical topology. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching. Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 2 Steering Node 1 Node 5 In both protection schemes. The VPRing/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves protection resources. and that the protection switching time is shortened. Figure 8-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. and the service failure time is less than 50 ms.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Protection Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5 Node 2 Node 1 Wapping The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber cut. the packets can reach their destination though in a reverse direction.

are set up at both the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. In this way. the receive end selects the service from the working path.8 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection NE2 ATM service Working path Protection path ATM service NE3 NE1 NE4 The OptiX OSN 3500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs). Under normal conditions. the receive end detects the failure and triggers the protection. the receive end selects the service from the protection path. which represent the working path and the protection path. Two connections (VP/VC). and thus the ATM service is protected. When the primary ring becomes faulty. 8-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .

2 Clock Working Mode The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.4 Clock Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function for managing the SSM.781. Clock The equipment can trace several clock sources and provides the clock protection function.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Clock 9 About This Chapter 9. 9.1 Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the following clock sources. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-1 . The standard SSM and extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching.3 Clock Outputs The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs. 9. 9. 9. and then to transmit them together to the customer.5 Tributary Retiming The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals from a digital synchronization network.

9. 9.2 Line Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the line clock source. l l Two 75-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) 9.3 Tributary Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace tributary clock sources.1. 9. the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the fourth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PD3.1.1 Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the following clock sources. Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) l l 9-2 . the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the ninth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PQ1. By default.1. 9. 9.4 Internal Clock Source When all line. PQ3. the internal clock source is of the lowest priority.1 External Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock source inputs.1. The specific tracing relation is as follows. the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PL3. tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable.1. or when only internal clock source is available in the priority list.2 Line Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the line clock source.1.9 Clock OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 9.1. l l l l External clock source Line clock source Tributary clock source Internal clock source The OptiX OSN 3500 supports priority setting for clock sources. PQM.1 External Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock source inputs.3 Tributary Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace tributary clock sources. DX1. When tracing tributary clock sources. the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the internal clock source as the system clock. 9. l When tracing tributary clock sources. When tracing tributary clock sources.

813. The frequency information complies with the related phase standard defined in ITU-T G. the OptiX OSN 3500 traces one clock source from the line clock source.3 Clock Outputs The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs.2. 9.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description l 9 Clock When tracing tributary clock sources. 9. 9.1 Locked Mode In the locked mode. or when only internal clock source is available in the priority list.1 Locked Mode In the locked mode.6 ppm. 9.2.781.3 Free-Run Mode The OptiX OSN 3500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whose frequency stability is not worse than ±4. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following clock outputs: Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-3 .2. The frequency information complies with the related phase standard defined in ITU-T G.4 Internal Clock Source When all line.2 Clock Working Mode The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.2 Hold-Over Mode If all clock sources are lost. 9.2. l l l Locked mode Holdover mode Free-run mode 9. tributary clock source and the external clock source. tributary clock source and the external clock source. the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the internal clock source as the system clock. the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the frequency information stored before the loss as its clock source.6 ppm.2.3 Free-Run Mode The OptiX OSN 3500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whose frequency stability is not worse than ±4. the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to any physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the SPQ4.1. tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable. 9. 9. 9.813. the OptiX OSN 3500 traces one clock source from the line clock source. the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the frequency information stored before the loss as its clock source.2.2 Hold-Over Mode If all clock sources are lost.

2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 3500 to choose the clock source of the highest quality to avoid the generation of clock lock ring. Figure 9-1 shows the clock configuration and the priority list when the SSM is not enabled. only two 75-ohm or two 120-ohm clocks but never both can be applied. the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the tributary retiming function. For this.9 Clock l l l OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Line clock outputs Tributary clock outputs External clock outputs NOTE For tributary clock outputs. The standard SSM and extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching. In this case.4. the clock sources are chosen or switched according to the priority list. Huawei presents the concept of the clock source ID. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock outputs: l l Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) NOTE For external clock outputs. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the synchronization status message (SSM) function for synchronous clocks. which helps improve the quality of output tributary clock.4. 9. The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source.4 Clock Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function for managing the SSM. The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source. 9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled For the OptiX OSN 3500.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled The standard SSM cannot avoid the clock lock ring in all cases. 9-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . the clock sources are chosen or switched according to the priority list. it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. when the SSM is not enabled. In this case.4. it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. Either the standard SSM or the extended SSM can be configured to realize the protection switching of clocks. 9. 9.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled For the OptiX OSN 3500. The priority list can be manually configured. when the SSM is not enabled. 9.

For this. These four bits are transmitted along with the SSM. tracing 9. If yes. When receiving the S1 byte. Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM BITS Fibre break Slot 11 Node 2 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 11 Slot 8 Node 1 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 8 Node 4 Node 3 Node 3. In this way. Huawei presents the concept of the clock source ID. a node checks if the clock source ID is transmitted by itself.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled The standard SSM cannot avoid the clock lock ring in all cases. See Figure 9-4.4. The extended SSM uses the first four bits of the S1 byte as the clock source ID and the latter four bits to indicate quality of the clock source.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Clock Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled BITS Node 1 Priority 1: BITS Priority 2: Internal Slot 8 Node 2 Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 3: Internal Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 8 Node 3 Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 3: Internal Node 4 Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 3: Internal Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot 11 Clock tracing 9. Figure 9-2 shows the application of the standard SSM. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-5 . the clock lock ring is avoided. the node takes the clock source as unavailable. Node 2 will automatically Clock select the clock source of best quality.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 3500 to choose the clock source of the highest quality to avoid the generation of clock lock ring.4. The first four bits of the S1 byte is used to specify a unique ID for a clock source.

In case signals travel from a chain or a ring into another ring. the clock ID is always manually set. In the case of configuration of clock protection for an SDH ring network. allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every junction node.1 Retiming Principle With the retiming technology. the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmit reference timing signals. Follow the listed rules to set the clock source ID.9 Clock OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled BITS Node 1 BITS failure BITS Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Clock tracing Node 2 Clock mutual tracing caused by BITS failure Node 4 Node 4 Node 3 Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID BITS BITS failure Node 1 Node 2 Node 4 Node 3 Node 1 finds that the ID sent from Node 4 is 1. Node 1 will not trace it to avoid the clock mutual tracing. which is originated from itself. allocate a clock ID for the line clock source (if any is involved at a junction node) in the signal traveling direction at every junction node. 9. l l l Allocate a clock ID for every external BITS. In case signals travel from a chain or a ring into another ring. l 9.5 Tributary Retiming The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals from a digital synchronization network.5. The clock ID is necessary only at key nodes rather than all nodes in an SDH network. Allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every node that has an external BITS. 9-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . Clock tracing A clock source ID can be manually set. and then to transmit them together to the customer. to effectively avoid the occurrence of clock lock ring.

such as a digital stored program control (SPC) switch. the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmit reference timing signals. The SDH equipment clock (SEC) f0. When PDH signals are adapted into the SDH transmission network.2 Application of the Retiming Function PDH signals can pass through an SDH network without retiming or with retiming.1 Retiming Principle With the retiming technology.2 Application of the Retiming Function PDH signals can pass through an SDH network without retiming or with retiming. the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid periodical slip. the output tributary signals carry a good timing reference. and then to store the data into the retiming buffer.5. The desynchronization function is used to recover the tributary signal data in an error-free manner. and thus frequency f1 of the output PDH signals becomes asynchronous with f0.5. is extracted and then added into the tributary signal data.5. 9. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-7 . On synchronous service equipment i.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Clock 9. Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram SDH clock source PLL SEC Extract clock(f1) Extract clock(f0) f1 Input tributary signal Desynchronization Retiming buffer f0 Output tributary signal The retiming function is performed in the following process: l l The phase-lock loop (PLL) is used to extract clock f1 from the received tributary signals. the frequency of output signals cannot be used as a timing reference for equipment k. PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network Without Retiming Figure 9-6 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network without retiming. l l 9. As a result. which serves the synchronous service equipment. pointer justifications cause phase jumps of output PDH signals. which is synchronous with the digital synchronization network. Figure 9-5 shows the retiming principle. In this way.

f 0 : Frequency that traces an SDH PRC S: Synchronization D: Desynchronization R: Retiming PRC : SDH primary reference clock PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network with Retiming Figure 9-7 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network with retiming. On synchronous service equipment i. Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming Transmission network PRC f1 Synchronous service equipment i f1: PDH signal frequency f0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC S: Synchronization D: Desynchronization R: Retiming PRC: SDH primary reference clock SEC: SDH equipment clock f0 f1 S S S S SDH MUX f0 D SDH D MUX D D R f0 SEC f0 Synchronous service equipment k The tributary signal frequency can be used as a synchronization clock for equipment k. or a combination of several SDH and PDH networks. Frequency f1 of the output PDH signals is still synchronous with f0. and thus jitters and wanders caused by pointer justifications are absorbed. 9-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . At the network output end. the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid periodical slip. The transmission network in Figure 9-7 can be a single SDH network. the retiming function provides a local timing reference f0. so equipment k can extract tributary timing signals for the synchronization purpose.9 Clock OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming SDH transmission network PRC f1 f1 S S S S f 1: PDH PDH signal frequency f0 f0 D Synchronous service equipment i SDH MUX SDH MUX D D D f1 Synchronous service equipment k The tributary signal frequency cannot be used as a synchronization clock for equipment k.

In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations.2 Network Management The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-1 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 OAM 10 About This Chapter The OptiX OSN 3500 provides maintenance and management functions. OAM 10.3 Security Management The T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE. the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the objectoriented management technology. the OptiX OSN 3500 system provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.1 Operation and Maintenance The cabinet. boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 system are designed with consideration of the customer requirements for easy operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence. 10. Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. 10. SDH. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module. The T2000 manages the OSN.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other. the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. transmission rate and wavelength. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces. boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 system are designed with consideration of the customer requirements for easy operation and maintenance of the equipment. an R-LOS alarm is raised at the optical interface of the local end. This facilitates the maintenance. By default. Each line board has the function to monitor lower order alarms. the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 3500 system. The N1PQ1.10 OAM OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 10. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 16 alarm input interfaces. The TU-AIS and TU_LOP alarms can be monitored. the GSCC board generates audible and visual alarms to urge the network administrators to take proper measures. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the remote maintenance function. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions. the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared. transmission distance. The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms of each NE in a network. N1PQM. The parameters that can be queried include optical interface type. When the equipment becomes faulty. Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators to locate and handle faults as soon as possible. The in-service upgrade of the board and the in-service loading of NE software are supported. Hence. the OptiX OSN 3500 system provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers. line boards and cross-connect boards support the PRBS test and the remote bit error test. four alarm output interfaces.1 Operation and Maintenance The cabinet. four output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators. fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode). the optical interface at the opposite end detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. l In the case of any emergency. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH optical module. Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) l l l l l l l l 10-2 . After the fiber connection recovers. – l The OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH and Ethernet optical interfaces. – l l l When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut. N2PQ1. and alarm concatenation interfaces to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms. the laser of the local end then also continuously launches laser beam. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. As a result. After receiving the laser beam launched by the opposite end. the laser pulse is generated at 60-second intervals and lasts for 2s every time. Users can choose singlemode or multi-mode optical modules as required.

The T2000 performs the security management over the OptiX OSN 3500 NE in the following ways: l l l l l l l NE user management NE login management NE login lockout NE setting lockout NE user group management NE security parameters NE security log – – – Query the users that login to the NE Delete an NE user Force an NE user out of the login state Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-3 . In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations. The T2000 manages the OSN. Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network.2 Network Management The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). SDH. the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the objectoriented management technology. which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors. to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 OAM 10. 10.3 Security Management The T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP) protocol.

.

This section lists specifications of these optical interfaces. 11. 11.6 Timeslot Numbering The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12. 11.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces.5 Transmission Performance The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T standards.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. electrical interfaces and environment. DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliary interfaces. 11.7 Power Supply Specification THe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the input of –48 V or –60 V DC power supply.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications 11 About This Chapter Technical Specifications The technical specifications cover the specifications of optical interfaces. 11.10 Safety Certification The OptiX OSN 3500 receives several safety certifications.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with related ITU-T Recommendations. 11. 11.1 Interface Types The OptiX OSN 3500 supports optical interfaces of different types. 11. Ethernet optical interfaces and ATM optical interfaces. 11.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-1 . 11.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards Different boards have different power consumption and weight.

11-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .12 Environment Requirement The OptiX OSN 3500 requires different environment for storage.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11. 11.11 Environmental Specification The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper environment for normal operation. transportation and operating. This section lists the environment requirements accordingly.

2 Specifications of the Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces. Framed E1 Two 75-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Alarm interface Auxiliary interface Sixteen alarm input interfaces. RS449. orderwire interface. Table 11-2 lists the specifications for the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. 155520 kbit/s.4 Laser Safety Class The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M. 1000Base-LX. V.24.2 Ethernet Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types. 11. 9953280kbit/s.35.3 ATM Optical Interface The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces. 2048 kbit/s. X. 34368 kbit/s.2.1 SDH Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types. 622080 kbit/s 1544 kbit/s.2. 44736 kbit/s. 2488320kbit/s. EIA530. This section lists specifications of these optical interfaces. 10.2. four alarm output interfaces.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications 11.1 Interface Types The OptiX OSN 3500 supports optical interfaces of different types. 155520 kbit/s RS232. Table 11-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Interface Type SDH optical interface Ethernet interface ATM interface PDH/SDH electrical interface DDN electrical interface Clock interface Rate and Feature 155520kbit/s. 2666057 kbit/s.71Gbit/s 10/100Base-TX. EIA530-A. 100Base-FX. Table 11-1 lists the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. 1000Base-SX. 11. 622080kbit/s.1 SDH Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types. 139264 kbit/s. 1000Base-ZX 34368 kbit/s. 11. Ethernet optical interfaces and ATM optical interfaces. alarm concatenated interfaces.2. four cabinet alarm indicator interfaces Administration interface. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-3 . data interface 11. V. 11.2. 11.21.

2 1480 to 1580 SLM –3 to 0 –34 –10 10 Table 11-3 lists the specifications for the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Type of optical source Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 622080 kbit/s I-4 1261 to 1360 MLM –15 to –8 –23 –8 8.1 1274 to 1356 MLM –15 to –8 –28 –8 8.2 L-4. 11-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .1 1280 to 1335 SLM –3 to 2 –28 –8 10 L-4.2 1480 to 1580 SLM –3 to 2 –34 –13 10.2 1480 to 1580 SLM –3 to 2 –28 –8 10 Ve-4.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 11-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Source type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 155520 kbit/s I-1 1260 to 1360 MLM –15 to –8 –23 –8 8.2 S-1.2 S-4.2 L-1.2 1480 to 1580 SLM –5 to 0 –34 –10 10 Ve-1.5 Table 11-4 lists the specifications for the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.1 1261 to 1360 MLM –15 to –8 –28 –8 8.1 1263 to 1360 MLM/ SLM –5 to 0 –34 –10 10 L-1.

1 SLM 1280 to 1335 –2 to 3 L-16.2 12 - - 1200 to 1600 2000 2800 3400 Table 11-5 lists the specifications for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.2 8.12 Without Without BA: –2 to BA and 3 PA: –2 to 3 With BA: 13 to 15 With BA: 15 to 18 Without BA and PA: –28 With PA: – 32 Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) –18 –18 –27 –28 –28 –28 Minimum overload (dBm) –3 0 –9 –9 –9 –9 Without BA and PA: –9 With PA: – 10 Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/ nm) 8.2 8. 2(Je) SLM 1530 to 1560 5 to 7 V-16.2d Ue-16.66 Gbit/s Ue-16.2 8.2c Ue-16.1 SLM 1260 to 1360 –5 to 0 L-16.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Table 11-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Type of optical source Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Specification 2488320 kbit/s I-16 MLM 1266 to 1360 –10 to –3 S-16.2 8. Table 11-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Specification 2. 2 SLM 1500 to 1580 –2 to 3 L-16.2f Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-5 .2 8.2 8.2 (Je) (BA) SLM 1530 to 1565 U-16.2(Je) (BA+PA) SLM 1550.

2b (BA +PA +DCU) 1550. Table 11-6 lists the specifications for the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. excluding the amplifiers.12 nm Without BA and PA: –5 to –1 With BA: 13 to 15 Without BA and PA: –5 to –1 With BA: 13 to 15 Without BA and PA: –27. b: The parameter is that of the PA. c: Parameters in the table are of the optical modules. Table 11-6 Specifications of the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Source type Mean launched power (dBm) Specification 9953280 kbit/s I-64.5 With PA: –42 –10 10 SF16+BA (17dB)+PA SF16+BA(17dB)+RA +PA Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Without BA and PA: –27. RA and PA: –27. RA and PA: –5 to –1 With BA: 15 to 18 Without BA.1 I-64.2b (BA) 1530 to 1565 SLM Without BA: –4 to 2 Le-64.2 Ls-64. BA and PA.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Item Classification code a Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Specification SF16+BA (14dB)+PA 1550. 2 1530 to 1565 SLM 4 to 7 V-64. BA (14) indicates that the optical power of the signal after amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. for example.5 With PA: –37 –10 10 Without BA. PA and DCU: –4 to –1 11-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .2 S-64.5 With PA: –37 Minimum overload point (dBm) b Minimum extinction ratio (dB) c –10 10 a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter.12 1290 to 1330 SLM –6 to – 1 1530 to 1565 SLM –5 to – 1 1530 to 1565 SLM –1 to 2 1530 to 1565 SLM 2 to 4 SLM Without BA.2b L-64. "FEC+BA +PA" indicates that the optical interface specifications include FEC.

Table 11-7 Specifications of the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Code content a Specification 10.2 8.2 8.2 6.2 8.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Item Specification With BA: 13 to 15 With BA: 13 to 15 –21 –21 Without BA.2c FEC+BA(14dB) +PA+DCU(60+80) c Ue-64.2d FEC+BA(17Db)+PA +DCU(80 x 2) Ue-64.2e FEC+BA(17dB)+RA +PA+DCU(60 x 3) Operating wavelength (nm) Source type Mean launched power (dBm)b Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)b Minimum overload point (dBm)b 1550.12nm SLM –4 to –1 –14 –1 –4 to –1 –14 –1 –4 to –1 –14 –1 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-7 .71 Gbit/s Ue-64. PA and DCU: –14 With PA: – 26 –1 –1 –1 –1 –8 –8 –1 Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) –11 –14 –14 –14 Minimum overload point (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/ nm) 6 8.2 8.6 500 800 1600 1200 1600 2040 (with DCU) Table 11-7 lists the specifications for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.2 8.

"FEC+BA +PA+DCU" indicates that the optical interface specifications include FEC.2 194.79 1558.4 195.6 194. b: The parameters in the table are for only for the optical module.25 1533.72 1550.1 193.56 1539.19 1537. BA.1.1 192.73 1542.47 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary .56 1555.32 No.3 193.61 1535.0 195.8 192.4 192.40 1536.3 192.52 1551.9 193.98 1558.5 194.82 1535.98 1538.75 1554.4 193.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Item Minimum extinction ratio (dB)b Dispersion capacity (ps/nm)b Specification 10 10 10 800 800 800 a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter.2 195. not for the amplifier and the DCU.17 1557.5 192.9 195. c: The parameter indicates different distances corresponding to different dispersion compensation values.2 193.94 1554. The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 can output wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDM system.3 194.694.4 194.5 Wavelength (nm) 1544.0 193. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 11-8 Frequency (THz) 192.04 1534. BA (14) indicates that the optical power of the signal after amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. for example. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Frequency (THz) 194.35 1540.61 1559.1 195.2 192.36 1556. Table 11-8 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces No.1 194.92 1550. Table 11-8 lists wavelengths and frequencies of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces.77 1538.6 192.94 1542.13 1553.8 194.7 192.7 194. PA and DCU.14 1541.33 1552.5 Wavelength (nm) 1560.3 195.53 1543.12 1549.

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-9 .72 1546.32 No.90 1531.3z and IEEE 802.2 640 –5 to –1 –28 –9 12800 10 2 666 057 kbit/s 640 –5 to –1 –28 –9 12800 10 9 953 280 kbit/s 40 –4 to –1 –14 –1 800 10 With FEC: 20 Without FEC: 26 With FEC: 16 Without FEC: 21 11.6 195.7 193.51 1547.12 1530.8 195.0 Wavelength (nm) 1548.33 1529. Table 11-10 lists the specifications.9 194.92 1546.55 Table 11-9 lists the specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.7 195.12 1545. 16 17 18 19 20 Frequency (THz) 193.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications No.2.3u standards.9 196. 36 37 38 39 40 Frequency (THz) 195. Table 11-9 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload point (dBm) Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) OSNR Specification 2 488 320 kbit/s 170 –2 to 3 –28 –9 3400 8. The specification of the Ethernet optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment comply with IEEE 802.68 1531.8 193.2 Ethernet Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types.6 193.0 Wavelength (nm) 1532.

55 km) 100Base-FX (15 km) 100Base-FX (2 km) MLM MLM MLM MLM MLM MLM 11.1 1263 to 1360 MLM/ SLM –5 to 0 –34 –10 L-1.3 ATM Optical Interface The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces. Table 11-11 and Table 11-12 list the specifications of the ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.2. Table 11-11 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Optical source type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Specification 155520 kbit/s Ie-1 1260 to 1360 MLM –19 to –14 –31 –14 S-1.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 11-10 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces Interface Type Sourc e Type Transmi tting Optical Power (dBm) –4 to 2 –2 to 5 –9 to –3 –9.2 1480 to 1580 SLM –5 to 0 –34 –10 Ve-1.5 to 0 –15 to –8 –19 to – 14 Central Wavele ngth (nm) 1480 to 1580 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 770 to 860 1261 to 1360 1270 to 1380 Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm) –3 –3 –3 0 –7 –14 Receiver Minimu m Sensitivi ty (dBm) –22 –23 –19 –17 –28 –30 Minimu m Extinctio n Ratio (dB) 9 9 9 9 10 10 1000Base-ZX (70 km) 1000Base-ZX (40 km) 1000Base-LX (10 km) 1000Base-SX (0.2 1480 to 1580 SLM –3 to 0 –34 –10 11-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .1 1261 to 1360 MLM –15 to –8 –28 –8 L-1.

N1EGS4. N1MST4. N3SL16.5 11.2. 62COA. N1ADL4. Table 11-13 Laser safety class Laser Safety Class CLASS 1 Board N1SL64. N1IDL4. N1EMS4. N2SLD4. N2EGS2.1 1280 to 1335 SLM -3 to 2 –28 –8 10 L-4. N1SLH1. N1SL16.2 10 10 10 Table 11-12 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Optical source type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 622080 kbit/s S-4.2 1480 to 1580 SLM -3 to 2 –34 –13 10. N2SLO1. TN11CMR2.1 1274 to 1356 MLM -15 to -8 –28 –8 8.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Item Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 10 8. N1EFF8 BA2. N3SL16A. N1SLQ1. N2SLQ1. N1SLQ4.2 L-4. BPA. N2SL16. N2SL64. Table 11-13 lists the safety classes of lasers used for the OptiX OSN 3500. N2SL4. N2SL1. N1ADQ1. N2SLQ16.4 Laser Safety Class The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M. N2EMR0. N1SLT1. N1FIB. N1OU08. N1EMR0. N1SL4. N2SLQ4. N2EGR2. ROP. N1SF16. N2OU08. N1EGS2. N1SF64. N1SLD4. N1MR2A. N1COA. TN11MR4. TN11OBU1. TN11CMR4 CLASS 1M Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-11 . N1LWX. TN11MR2. N1SL1. 61COA. N1IDQ1. N1EGT2. N1MR2C.2 1480 to 1580 SLM -3 to 2 –28 –8 10 Ve-4. N1SLD64.

11.703-compliant 11.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11.2 DDN Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN interfaces.1 PDH Electrical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types. Table 11-14 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces Interface Type Code Signal bit rate at the output interface Attenuation tolerance at the input interface Frequency deviation tolerance at the input interface Anti-interference capability of input interface 1544 kbit/s B8ZS. 11. Table 11-15 lists the DDN interface types.1 PDH Electrical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types. Table 11-14 lists the specifications of the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.3 Auxiliary Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.3. 11.3. AMI 2048 kbit/s HDB3 34368 kbit/s HDB3 44736 kbit/s B3ZS 139264 kbit/s CMI 155520 kbit/s CMI ITU-T G. 11-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . 11.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces.703compliant ITU-T G. DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliary interfaces.3.2 DDN Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN interfaces.3.3.

21. 704. S2.703. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-13 . Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A. S3 and S4 interfaces on the AUX. Complies with EIA RS-530.703 ITU-U G. V.The RS-232 interfaces are S1. The frame structure complies with ITU-T G.35 interface V. 64 kbit/s Interface Table 11-16 lists the specifications of the 64 kbit/s electrical interface.21 interface RS-449 interface RS-530 interface RS-530A interface 11.703 ITU-U G. Complies with ITU-T V.35.24 interface X. which is the F1 interface on the AUX board. RS-422A).24.3.3 Auxiliary Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 provides many auxiliary interfaces. Table 11-16 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface Item Bit rate Timing signal Coding style Outgoing pulse shape Output interface characteristic Incoming interface characteristic Specification 64 kbit/s From RX ITU-U G. Complies with ITU-T X. Complies with EIA RS-530A.703 ITU-U G.703 RS-232 Interfaces Table 11-17 lists the specifications of the RS-232 electrical interfaces.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Table 11-15 DDN interface types Interface Type Framed E1 interface type N x 64 kbit/s interface Description Framed E1 signal Standard Physical and electrical features comply with ITU-T G. Complies with ITU-T V.

S2.5±1 dBr –3.The RS-422 interfaces are S1.0 V Orderwire Phone Interface Table 11-19 lists the specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 11-17 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces Item Bit rate Mode Electrical level Specification 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum RS-422 Tx & Rx data only ±2.23 Specification 11-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . Table 11-18 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces Item Bit rate Mode Electrical level Specification 19.5±1 dBr 600 ohms 300 Hz to 3400 Hz 18 mA –4/0/0 dB 0/–7/0 dB DTMF compliant with ITU-T Q.2 kbit/s to the maximum RS-232 Tx & Rx data only ±5 V to ±15 V RS-422 Interfaces Table 11-18 lists the specifications of the RS-422 electrical interfaces. Table 11-19 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface Item Speech channel interface Impedance Bandwidth Operating current Input gain Output gain Signaling Analog EOW extension Impedance Bandwidth Tx level Rx level 600 ohms 300 Hz to 3400 Hz –3. S3 and S4 interfaces on the AUX.

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-15 . Table 11-22 lists the performance of the output jitter and bit error in an SDH/PDH network.1 Clock Interface Type The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces. 813. Table 11-20 Clock features Clock Type External synchronization source Synchronization output Feature Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G. Table 11-21 Timing and synchronization performance Output Jitter G.703) or 2048 kHz (G. 813.4. 11.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications 11.5 Transmission Performance The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T standards. Table 11-21 lists the timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment.1 Clock Interface Type The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces.4.703) or 2048 kHz (G. 11.703) clock outputs Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) clock outputs 11. 11.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T G.703) clock inputs Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.813 compliant Output Frequency of Internal Oscillator in Free-Run Mode G.4. Table 11-20 lists the clock features of the OptiX OSN 3500.4.703) clock inputs Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T G.813 compliant 11.703) or 2048 kHz (G.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with related ITU-T Recommendations.813 compliant Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked Mode G.

813/G.7 Power Supply Specification THe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the input of –48 V or –60 V DC power supply.825 compliant Jitter at PDH Interface G. Table 11-25 lists the specifications of the power supply.826 compliant 11. Table 11-23 and Table 11-24 list the details.783 compliant Bit Error G. Table 11-23 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I) TUG2 (7-1) TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 (3-3) 1 2 2 4 3 2 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 4 5 TUG2 (7-2) 4 2 5 4 6 5 2 6 4 7 6 2 7 4 8 TUG2 (7-3) 7 2 8 4 9 8 2 9 5 0 9 3 0 5 1 TUG (7-4) 1 0 3 1 5 2 1 1 3 2 5 3 1 2 3 3 5 4 TUG (7-5) 1 3 3 4 5 5 1 4 3 5 5 6 1 5 3 6 5 7 TUG (7-6) 1 6 3 7 5 8 1 7 3 8 5 9 1 8 3 9 6 0 TUG (7-7) 1 9 4 0 6 1 2 0 4 1 6 2 2 1 4 2 6 3 Table 11-24 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II) TUG2 (7-1) TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 (3-3) 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 5 TUG2 (7-2) 4 5 6 2 5 2 6 2 7 4 6 4 7 4 8 TUG2 (7-3) 7 8 9 2 8 2 9 3 0 4 9 5 0 5 1 TUG2 (7-4) 1 0 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 5 2 5 3 5 4 TUG2 (7-5) 1 3 1 4 1 5 3 4 3 5 3 6 5 5 5 6 5 7 TUG2 (7-6) 1 6 1 7 1 8 3 7 3 8 3 9 5 8 5 9 6 0 TUG2 (7-7) 1 9 2 0 2 1 4 0 4 1 4 2 6 1 6 2 6 3 11.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 11-22 Transmission performance Jitter at STM-N Interface G.6 Timeslot Numbering The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12.823/G. Table 11-25 Power supply specifications Item Power supply mode Nominal voltage 11-16 Specification DC power supply –48 V or –60 V Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary .

04 0.5 17.12 1.01 1.90 0.10 1.18 1.10 1.98 0.04 0.98 11-17 N1SL64 N2SL64 N1SLD6 4a N1SL16 N3SL16 N2SL16 N1SLQ4 N2PQ3 N2PL3 N2SLQ4 N1SLD4 N2SLD4 N1SL4 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) N1TSB 8 N1TSB 4 N3SL16 A N2SLQ 16 N1EGS 2 N2PD3 N2PL3 A N2EGS 2 N1EGT 2 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0 N1EFS4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary .61 20 16 12.28 0. power consumption Specification –38.91 1.04 1.9 1.98 0.98 0.2 23 35 35 35 30 Weight (kg) 0.12 1.09 1.04 0. current 20 A a: This value indicates the maximum power consumption for the enhanced subrack. Table 11-26 Power consumption and weight of boards Board Power Consumption (W) 30 32 41.6 V or –48 V to –72 V 1100 Wa 600 W Max. Table 11-26 lists the power consumption and weight of boards.05 1.4 V to –57.00 Board Power Consumption (W) 5 2.92 0.92 0. 11.39 35 40 12 12 43.28 0.2 20 21.01 1.6 12 16 15 15 15 Weight (kg) 1.92 1.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards Different boards have different power consumption and weight.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Item Voltage range Max.

901 1.112 1.082 1.20 1.95 0.81 N2SL4 N1SLQ1 N2SLQ1 N1SL1 N2SL1 N1SLH1 N2SLO1 N1BA2 N1BPA DCU N1SEP1 N1EU08 N1OU08 .90 1.946 11-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .04 1.00 1.15 20 20 0 17 11 6 Weight (kg) 1.97 0.90 0.50 0.872 1.98 1.04 1.41 2.37 0.4 0.42 0.656 25 10 20 2.91 0.00 1.91 0.00 2.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Board Power Consumption (W) 15 15 15 14 14 22 26.95 0.41 Board Power Consumption (W) 30 50 50 54 21 2 6 35 37 40 63 63 27 Weight (kg) 0.04 1.12 62 65 93.00 2.41 0.01 0.88 0.103 1. N2OU08 N1EU04 N1SPQ4 N2SPQ4 N1MU0 4 N1IXCS A N1PD3 N2EFS4 N1EMR 0 N2EMR 0 N2EGR 2 N1EFT8 A N1ETF8 N1EFF8 N1ADL 4 N1ADQ 1 N1MST 4 N1SXC SA N1SXC SB N1GXC SA N1EXC SA N1UXC SA/B N1IXCS B N1XCE N1GSC C N3GSC C 6 24 24 2 93.00 1.656 19 0.10 0.20 1.44 0.01 1.

35 0.2 20 0.9 0.10 N1PL3 N1D34S N1C34S N1PQM N2PQ1 N1PQ1 N1D75S N1D12S N1PL3A N1SLT1 N1SF16 N1D12B N1EMS 4 N1FIB N1AUX N1FAN N1FAN A N1PIU N1MR2 A N1MR2 C N1LWX N1ETS8 N1EFT8 N1IDQ1 N1IDL4 N1EGS 4 N1DX1b N1DXA TN11O BU1 TN11M R4 25 25 16 0. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-19 . b: After the TPS is performed.6 65 Weight (kg) 0.37 1.755 0.3 0.9 1.38 0. the power consumption of the N1DX1 board is 31 W.10 a: If the transmission distance of the optical module on the N1SLD64 board is 2 km.01 1.8 0.848 1.01 1.2 0.5 26 36.50 x 3 1.003 1.01 1.962 0.50 x 3 1.2 W.31 1.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Board Power Consumption (W) 15 2 2 22 13 19 5.00 0.01 1.10 Board Power Consumption (W) 0 19 16 x 3 30 x 3 8 0 0 30 2. its power consumption is 41.01 0.5 9 15 15 26 1 65 (without interface board) 75 (with interface board) Weight (kg) 1.15 1.01 1.96 1.31 1.2 0.10 0.2 0.9 TN11M R2 TN11C MR2 TN11C MR4 N1SLD 16 0.00 1.09 0.01 1.35 1.6 36.22 1.

contact discharge: 6 kV) Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for DC ports Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for signal ports Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-3 (10 V/m) Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI.2 IEC 61000-4-4 (2 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.10 Safety Certification The OptiX OSN 3500 receives several safety certifications.2 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V) ETSI EN 300 386 V1. The equipment has passed electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests.3.3. Table 11-27 lists the EMC-related test specifications.3.2 IEC 61000-4-5 (4 kV) Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3. Table 11-27 EMC test results Item Radiated emission Standard CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A Conducted emission for DC port CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A Conducted emission for signal ports CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A Immunity to radiated electric field ETSI EN 300 386 V1. Table 11-28 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received. 11-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .3.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11.2 IEC 61000-4-4 (2 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.2 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V) Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Result Passed 11.2 IEC 61000-4-2 (Air discharge: 8 kV.2 IEC 61000-4-5 (1 kV) Immunity to continuous conducted interference for DC ports Immunity to continuous conducted interference for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.

10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1 IEC60825-2 EN60825-1 EN60825-2 GB7247 Health ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950-1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943 Laser safety FDA rules 21 CFR 1040.1 Environment protection RoHS 11. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-21 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Table 11-28 Safety certifications Item Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Standard CISPR22 Class A CISPR24 EN55022 Class A EN50024 ETSI EN 300 386 Class A ETSI ES 201 468 CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Class A AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A GB9254 Class A VCCI Class A Safety IEC 60950-1 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.11 Environmental Specification The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper environment for normal operation.

12. Climate Table 11-30 lists the climate requirements for storage. 11. This section lists the environment requirements accordingly.12.12. l l GF 014-95: Environment conditions for the communication equipment room ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Environment for Transportation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for transportation. Table 11-30 Climate requirements for storage Item Altitude 11-22 Range ≤ 5000 m Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .1 Environment for Storage The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for storage.1 Environment for Storage The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for storage. Table 11-29 Environment specifications for long-term operation Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature Relative humidity Anti-seismic performance Range ≤ 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 0℃ to 45℃ 10% to 90% Capable of protecting itself against 7 to 9 Richter scale earthquake 11.12. 11. The following international standards are taken as the reference for specifying the environment requirements. transportation and operating. 11.3 Environment for Operation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for operating.12 Environment Requirement The OptiX OSN 3500 requires different environment for storage.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description The OptiX OSN 3500 can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table 11-29.2 Partly temperaturecontrolled location NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection l 11.

Air Cleanness l The air must be free from explosive. l Table 11-31 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage Mechanical Active Substance Suspending dust Precipitable dust Gravel Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Content ≤ 5. Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton. the equipment must be stored indoors. magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. No water should remain on the floor or leak to the equipment carton. l l l l The carton must be intact. such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities. such as eumycete and mycete. No water is on the ground where the carton is placed. The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 11-31. The equipment should be placed away from places where water leakage is possible.00 mg/m3 ≤ 20.0 mg/m2·h ≤ 300 mg/m3 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-23 . Keep rodents such as mice away. the following four conditions are required. electric-conductive.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Item Air pressure Temperature Temperature change rate Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Air flowing speed Range 70 kPa to 106 kPa –40℃ to +70℃ ≤ 1 ℃/min 10% to 100% ≤ 1120 W/s2 ≤ 600 W/s2 ≤ 30 m/s Waterproof Requirement Requirement for storing equipment on the customer site: Generally. The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunshine. Biological Environment l l Avoid multiplication of microbe. If the equipment is stored outdoors.

11 ms 0 kPa NOTE Static load is the pressure from upside. 11-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .2 Environment for Transportation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for transportation.50 mg/m3 ≤ 1.10 mg/m3 ≤ 0. Table 11-33 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage Item Random vibration Sub-Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency range Non-steady impact Impact response spectrum II Static load Range 1 m2/s3 5 Hz to 20 Hz –3 dBA 20 Hz to 200 Hz - ≤ 300 m/s2. 11. Table 11-32 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage Chemical Active Substance SO2 H2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content ≤ 0.01 mg/m3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3 ≤ 0. Climate Table 11-34 lists the climate requirements for transportation. which the equipment with package can endure when the equipment is piled up in a specific manner.11 Technical Specifications l OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 11-32.05 mg/m3 Mechanical Stress Table 11-33 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.12.10 mg/m3 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3 ≤ 0.00 mg/m3 ≤ 0.

Air Cleanness l The air must be free from explosive. l Table 11-35 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation Mechanical Active Substance Suspending dust Precipitable dust Gravel Content No requirement ≤ 3. Biological Environment l l Avoid multiplication of microbe. such as eumycete and mycete.0 mg/m2·h ≤ 100 mg/m3 l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 11-36. magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton. No water remains in the transportation tool. Keep rodents such as mice away. electric-conductive. The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 11-35. l l l The carton must be intact.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Table 11-34 Climate requirements for transportation Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature Temperature change rate Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Air flowing speed Range ≤ 5000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa –40℃ to +70℃ ≤ 3℃/min 10% to 100% ≤ 1120 W/s2 ≤ 600 W/s2 ≤ 30 m/s Waterproof Requirement The following conditions are required for the transportation. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-25 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .

11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 11-36 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation Chemical Active Substance SO2 H2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content ≤ 0.12.10 mg/m3 ≤ 0.01 mg/m3 ≤ 0. 11 ms 0 kPa 11.10 mg/m3 ≤ 0. Table 11-37 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation Item Random vibration Sub-Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency range Non-steady impact Impact response spectrum II Static load Range 1 m2/s3 5 Hz to 20 Hz –3 dBA 20 Hz to 200 Hz - ≤ 300 m/s2.30 mg/m3 ≤ 0.3 Environment for Operation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for operating.05 mg/m3 Mechanical Stress Table 11-37 lists the requirements for transportation of OptiX OSN 3500 equipment.00 mg/m3 ≤ 0. Climate Table 11-38 and Table 11-39 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-38 Requirements for temperature and humidity Temperature Long-term operation 11-26 Relative Humidity Short-term operation Long-term operation Short-term operation Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .10 mg/m3 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3 ≤ 1.

Keep rodents such as mice away.4 m in front of the equipment.5 m above the floor and 0.4 mg/m3 ≤ 15 mg/m2·h ≤ 100 mg/m3 l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 11-41. l Table 11-40 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance Mechanical Active Substance Dust particle Suspending dust Precipitable dust Gravel Content ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3 ≤ 0. and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-27 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Technical Specifications Temperature 0℃ to 45℃ –5℃ to 55℃ Relative Humidity 10% to 90% 5% to 95% NOTE The temperature and humidity values are tested in the place 1. The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 11-40. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours. such as eumycete and mycete. Air Cleanness l The air must be free from explosive. electric-conductive. Table 11-39 Other climate requirements Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature change rate Solar radiation Heat radiation Air flowing speed Range ≤ 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa ≤ 5℃/h ≤ 700 W/s2 ≤ 600 W/s2 ≤ 1 m/s Biological Environment l l Avoid multiplication of microbe. magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust.

Table 11-42 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation Item Sinusoidal vibration Sub-Item Velocity Acceleration Frequency range Impact Impact response spectrum II Static load Range ≤ 5 mm/s 5 Hz to 62 Hz ≤ 2 m/s2 62 Hz to 200 Hz Half-sin wave. which the equipment with package can endure when the equipment is piled up in a specific manner.006 mg/m3 ≤ 0.20 mg/m3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3 ≤ 0.0 mg/m3 Mechanical Stress Table 11-42 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation. 30 m/s2.01 mg/m3 ≤ 0.11 Technical Specifications OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 11-41 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation Chemical Active Substance SO2 H2S NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 CO Content ≤ 0. 11 ms 0 kPa NOTE Static load is the pressure from upside.01 mg/m3 ≤ 0. 11-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .005 mg/m3 ≤ 5.05 mg/m3 ≤ 0.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description A Compliant Standards A A.4 Environment Related Standards Compliant Standards This chapter lists the standards that OptiX OSN 3500 conforms to. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-1 .3 IETF Standards A.1 ITU-T Recommendations A.2 IEEE Standards A.

826 G. 2048 kbit/ s.774 1-5 G.1 ITU-T Recommendations Table A-1 IUT-T recommendations Recommendation G.831 Description Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces Synchronous frame structures used at 1544.773 G.694.692 G.775 G.A Compliant Standards OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description A. constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) A-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .783 G. 6312 kbit/s.813 G.703 G.2 G.1 G.704 G.694.823 G. 8448 kbit/s and 44736 kbit/s hierarchical levels Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and clearance criteria Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management Architectures of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Error performance parameters and objectives for international.803 G.825 G.784 G.702 G.707 G.824 G.

841 G.957 G.3 IEEE802. type 100BaseT Media access control (MAC) parameters. physical Layer.661 G. physical Layer.663 X.3z IEEE802.7042 I.2 IEEE Standards Table A-2 IEEE standards Standard IEEE Std 802.958 Q.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description A Compliant Standards Recommendation G.662 G.630 Description Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface Principles for a telecommunication management network Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber amplifiers Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and subsystems Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems Ethernet over LAPS Generic framing procedure (GFP) Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions ATM protection switching A.610 I. repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation Virtual bridged local area networks Aggregation of multiple link segments IEEE 802.86 G.3010 G.1q IEEE802.812 M. medium attachment units.3u Description Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification Media access control (MAC) parameters.811 Q.7041 G. and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation.3ad Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-3 .842 G.

A Compliant Standards OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Standard IEEE802.17 Description Media access control (MAC) bridges Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications A.3 IETF Standards Table A-3 IETF standards Standard RFC2615(1999) RFC1662(1994) RFC1661(1994) RFC2514 Description Point-to-point protocol (PPP) over SONET/SDH PPP in HDLC-like Framing Point-to-point protocol (PPP) Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECTIDENTITIES for ATM management A.2 Partly temperature-controlled location Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements: physical protection A-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .4 Environment Related Standards Table A-4 Environment related standards Standard IEC 61000 ETS 300 019-1-3 NEBS GR-63-CORE Description Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Class 3.1D IEEE802.

it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. That is. one working SNC/trail. A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals. NOTE . It is a protocol within the OSI layer 1. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit. one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. and Reshaping. Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-1 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description B Glossary B 1+1 protection 1:N protection 3R A ATM Regeneration. the OSN products can add and drop several wavelengths directly. generally to -3 dB optical (-6 dB electrical). It may have one extra traffic signal. Asynchronous Transfer Mode. Retiming. Building Integrated Timing Supply. A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into the OSN series products. BITS Build-in WDM C Congestion The condition that exists in a network if the capacity needed for the instantaneous traffic exceeds the bandwidth available in the network. Glossary A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal. N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. of the zero frequency value. An ATM cell consists of a 5 octet header followed by 48 octets of data. B Bandwidth That value numerically equal to the lowest frequency at which the magnitude of the baseband transfer function of an optical fibre decreases to a specified fraction. A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office.The bandwidth is limited by several mechanisms: mainly modal distortion and chromatic dispersion in multimode fibres.

It applies only to LP and excess Medium priority traffic coming from the MAC client. which allows the user to allocate more ring bandwidth to certain nodes. release. Ethernet Private LAN. parts of which may be carried out in more than one open system. Both ring networks have two nodes interconnected with each other. it improves network availability. Dual Node Interconnection. An EPL service is a point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. In the context of message handling. Convergence Conversion D Distributed transaction DNI A transaction. or alters a probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified. DNI not only provides protection for ring-cross services but also for either failed node of two interconnected nodes. It is a kind of technology for enhancing the reliability of digital transmission. E EPL Ethernet Private Line. The process of developing a model of the echo path which will be used in the echo estimator to produce the estimate of the circuit echo. FEC I B-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . Each node is assigned a weight. Forward error correction. An EVPL service is a service that is both a line service and a virtual private service. Ethernet Virtual Private Line. European Telecommunications Standards Institute EPLn EVPL EVPLn ETSI F Fairness algorithm A mechanism that enforces fairness among the nodes on the ring. Therefore. An EPLn service is both a LAN service and a private service. supervision and maintenance. An EVPLn service is a service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.B Glossary OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Control plane A set of communicating entities that are responsible for the establishment of connections including set-up. It can increase transmission distance and improve network performance. A control plane is supported by a signalling network. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another.

IMA frame IMA group IMA sublayer IMA virtual link ASON service IP over DCC L Loopback The fault of each path on the optical fibre can be located by setting loopback for each path of the line. An example of such an auxiliary channel is a data communications channel for the purposes of transferring management data between management entities. The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication. This is referred to as an IMA group. The service within the transmission network is requested by the T2000 and then created by the NE’s control plane through signaling. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description B Glossary IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM. Sublayer part of the Physical layer and located between the interface specific Transmission Convergence (TC) sublayer and the ATM layer. Group of links at one end used to establish an IMA virtual link to other end.These management entities are not trail termination and adaptation functions. There are three kinds of loopback modes: No loopback. M MSP Multiplexer Multiplex Section Protection. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells. transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group. Virtual link established between two IMA units over a number of physical links (IMA group). numbered 0 to M-l. An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels. The MSP function provides capability for switching a signal from a working to a protection section. Service that is configured directly by the T2000. inloop. NOTE . the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed. O Orderwire Overhead information It establishes the voice communication among the operators and maintenance engineers work in each working station. R Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-3 . Auxiliary Channel Overhead Information is information that may be transferred by an optical network layer but which does not by necessity have to be associated with a particular connection. outloop.

full-duplex data channel. waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits. SNCP SLA Service plane T TPS Tributary Protection Switching. Service Level Agreement. availability. typically used for a single voice connection. TCM Timeslot B-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) . and so on. A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails. The SLA may include a number of attributes such as. Note that a) and b) use the totality of the transfer capabilities including control and management functionalities. the TCM is located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures. and so on.B Glossary OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description RPR Resilient Packet Ring. traffic contract. Tandem Connection Monitor. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section). service invocation. Its significance varies depending on the service offerings. SubNetwork Connection Protection. A negotiated agreement between an end user and the service provider. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technology supporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ring configuration. The service plane comprises: a) service presentation functionality being presented to the end user. but not limited to. Regeneration S SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A function provided by the equipment. is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. or if its performance falls below a required level. standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks. control service level agreement function. For example. authentication. pricing and billing mechanism. encryption. synchronous. Single timeslot on a E1 digital interface—that is. a 64-kbps. b) service implementation aspects with which the end user interacts. The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes. performance. In the SDH transport hierarchy.

Available Bit Rate Add/Drop Multiplexer Alternate Mark Inversion Automatic Protection Switching Automatically Switched Optical Network Asynchronous Transfer Mode Building Integrated Timing Supply System Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit Committed Access Rate Constant Bit Rate Continuity Check Coded Mark Inversion Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol Constrained Shortest Path First Data Communication Channels Data Circuit-terminal Equipment Digital Data Network Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-1 .OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description C Acronyms and Abbreviations C A ABR ADM AMI APS ASON ATM B BITS BPA C CAR CBR CC CMI CR-LDP CSPF D DCC DCE DDN Acronyms and Abbreviations This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.

C Acronyms and Abbreviations OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description DVB-ASI DWDM E ECC EMC EPL EPLAN ESCON ETS ETSI EVPL EVPLAN F FC FE FEC FPGA G GE GFP GMPLS H HDB3 HDLC I IEC IEEE IETF IGMP IMA Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Embedded Control Channel Electromagnetic Compatibility Ethernet Private Line Ethernet Private LAN Enterprise Systems Connection European Telecommunication Standards European Telecommunications Standards Institute Ethernet Virtual Private Line Ethernet Virtual Private LAN fiber Channel Fast Ethernet Forward Error Correction Field Programmable Gate Array Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure General Multiprotocol Label Switching High Density Bipolar of order 3 code High level Data Link Control International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Internet Engineering Task Force Internet Group Management Protocol Inverse Multiplexing for ATM C-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .

Administration and Maintenance Operation. Maintenance and Provision OptiX Software Platform Optical Terminal Multiplexer Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Provider Edge Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-3 . Local Area Network Link Access Procedure-SDH Loopback Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Local Craft Terminal Link State Path Through Label Switch Path Media Access Control Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer Message Communication Function Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser) Multiprotocol Label Switching Multiplex Section Protection Network Equipment-Building System Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate Network Side Optical Add/drop Multiplexer Operation. Administration.Telecommunication Standardization Sector Link Aggregation Control Protocol Local Area Network.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description C Acronyms and Abbreviations ITU-T L LACP LAN LAPS LB LCAS LCT LPT LSP M MAC MADM MCF MLM MPLS MSP N NEBS nrt-VBR NS O OADM OAM OAM&P OSP OTM P PDH PE International Telecommunication Union .

C Acronyms and Abbreviations OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description PPP Q QoS R RPR RSTP rt-VBR RSVP-TE S SDH SFP SLA SLM SNCP STP T TCM TPS U UBR V VC VCC VLAN VP VPC VPN W WDM WTR Point-to-Point Protocol Quality of Service Resilient Packet Ring Rapid Span Tree Protocol Real Time Variable Bite rate Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering Extensions Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Small Form Pluggable Service Level Agreement Sigle-Longitudinal Mode (laser) Sub-Network Connection Protection Span Tree Protocol Tandem connection monitoring. Tributary Protection Switching Unspecified Bit Rate Virtual Channel Virtual Channel Connection Virtual Local Area Network Virtual Path Virtual Path Connection Virtual Private Network Wavelength Division Multiplexing Wait-to-Restore C-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15) .

2-3 D data processing board. 7-6 preset restoring trail. 4-2 type. 7-21 protocol encryption. 3-36 E E13 function. 5-25 function. 9-3 clock protection extended SSM enabled. 4-5 trail group. 5-9 ETH-OAM. 9-3 tributary. 11-24 EPL based on port. 7-7 software. 5-7 based on port+VLAN. 7-8 end-to-end. 2-20 Ethernet B board function.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Index Index A access capacity slot. 11-20 environment operation. 7-20 service association. 2-4 ASON copper service. 3-30 software. 5-23 protection. 2-13 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-1 . 2-7 auxiliary board. 9-2 cross-connect capacity. 5-8 EPLAN. 2-22 built-in WDM. 3-40 C cabinet. 9-2 locked mode. 3-2 clock. 5-31 service. 9-5 clock source external. 7-18 service migration. 9-5 SSM not enabled. 7-16 link control link. 9-4 standard SSM enabled. 7-3 TE link. 7-4 mesh networking. 7-21 feature. 7-17 ATM application. 11-21 storage. 3-37 DDN application. 7-20 shared risk link group. 2-19 electromagnetic compatibility. 3-30 board version replacement. 7-20 service optimization. 7-23 reverting route. 7-13 SLA. 7-5 equilibrium of network traffic. 11-22 transportation. 9-3 internal. 5-32 function. 7-15 diamond service. 7-22 tunnel. 2-18 gold service. 2-7 DDN processing board. 7-22 silver service. 5-29 ATM service. 9-3 line. 2-23 clock output. 9-3 hold-over mode. 7-12 iron service. 9-2 free-run mode. 11-26 specification.

5-30 service. 8-4 1:N for +3. 2-9 SAN service. 8-4 1+1 for ATM board. 3-39 OSI over DCC application. 2-10 ATM service. 5-7 function. 2-7 EVPL. 2-10 clock. 6-4 I intelligent fan. 2-9 type. 8-6 1+1 hot backup cross-connect and timing. 6-2 HWECC. 5-11 virtual concatenation group protection. 2-22 network management. 8-7 VP-ring/VC-ring. 10-3 security management. 6-8 solution. 6-5 feature. 10-2 i-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary . 6-4 IP over DCC. 5-10 extended subrack. 2-7 PRBS function. 8-3 PIU. 2-10 DDN service. 8-4 1+1 PPS. 6-8 P PDH processing board. 8-9 network level. 11-20 SAN feature. 6-6 R REG function. 8-18 SNCP. 9-7 ROPA system. 2-8 SDH DCN background. 6-6 OSI over DCC. 5-14 protection. 10-3 operation and maintenance. 2-11 S safety certification. 2-9 Ethernet service. 2-7 L LCAS dynamic bandwidth adjustment. 8-6 SCC. 5-8 EVPLAN. 5-20 service. 8-16 linear MSP. 2-10 PDH service. 2-17 fiber-shared virtual trail. 2-16 retiming application. 2-18 optical-path-shared MSP. 2-10 alarm. 5-12 M M13 function. 3-35 PDH service. 8-6 inter-board alarm suppression. 2-9 orderwire. 8-7 DNI. 6-3 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) O OAM information interworking. 8-11 TPS. 5-2 protection. 8-5 1+1 for WDM. 2-21 protection 1+1 BPS. 5-18 function. 2-13 RPR application. 6-8 feature. 4-3 network application. 8-2 under abnormal conditions.Index OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description application. 8-15 equipment level. 5-11 service. 8-17 RPR. 9-7 principle. 8-8 MSP ring. 6-6 feature. 2-21 interface administration. 2-19 N NE software. 11-3 IP over DCC application. 2-14 optical booster amplifier board. 1-1 networking. 8-19 H hot fix. 2-21 HWECC application. 2-10 SDH service.3 V.

11-8 subrack structure. 3-39 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-3 . 2-8 slot access capacity. 11-5 STM-4 optical interface. 11-10 auxiliary interface. 2-4 allocation. 3-30 T T2000 system. 11-7 subrack. 11-12 Ethernet optical interface. 4-2 software package loading. 4-4 TCM. 3-28 wavelength and frequency. 11-17 power supply. 3-4 system architecture. 3-33 SDH service. 11-11 PDH electrical interface. 4-2 specification ATM optical interface.OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Index SDH processing board. 2-6 service access capacity. 11-4 FEC. 11-15 colored optical interface. 11-16 timing and synchronization performance. 11-3 STM-16 optical interface. 11-4 STM-64 optical interface. 11-13 clock interface . 11-12 power consumption and weight. 3-5 software board. 11-16 STM-1 optical interface. 11-3 laser safety class. 11-15 transmission performance. 11-6 FEC. 11-9 DDN interface. 2-19 timeslot numbering. 11-15 W WDM board. 2-20 software structure. 11-9 interface.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->